Itron 921 Gateway/Telco User Manual Modem

Silver Spring Networks Gateway/Telco Modem

Modem User Manual

AT Commands forRCV56ACx, RCV336ACx,RCV288ACx, and RCV144ACx ModemsReference Manual(Preliminary)Order No. 1048Rev. 4, February 20, 1997
AT Command Reference Manualii 1048NOTICEInformation furnished by Rockwell International Corporation is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, noresponsibility is assumed by Rockwell International for its use, nor any infringement of patents or other rights ofthird parties which may result from its use. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patentrights of Rockwell International other than for circuitry embodied in Rockwell products. Rockwell Internationalreserves the right to change circuitry at any time without notice. This document is subject to change withoutnotice.K56flex is a trademark of Lucent Technologies and Rockwell International.ConfigurACE is a trademark of Rockwell International.MNP is a registered trademark of Microcom, Inc.Hayes is a registered trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 iiiPREFACEThis manual supersedes the following manuals:1.  AT Command Reference Manual for the RC288ACi and RC288ACL Modem Families (Order No. 1048, Rev.3, January9, 1996).2.  Addendum 1 to AT Commands for  RC288ACx and RC144ACx Modem Families (Order No. 1048R3A1, Rev.1, August2, 1996).This revision incorporates Addendum 1 to AT Commands for RC288ACx and RC144ACx Modem Families (Order No.1048R3A1, Rev.1, August 2, 1996); adds K56flex command (+MS), connect and carrier messages; and adds V.80commands.
AT Command Reference Manualiv 1048This page is intentionally blank.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 vTable of Contents1. INTRODUCTION...........................................................................................................................................................1-11.1 OVERVIEW..........................................................................................................................................................1-11.1.1 Command Syntax....................................................................................................................................1-11.1.2 Command Descriptions............................................................................................................................1-11.1.3 Call Progress and Blacklisting Parameters...............................................................................................1-21.1.4 ConfigurACE II for Windows Utility Program.............................................................................................1-21.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTATION ........................................................................................................................1-22. COMMAND SYNTAX ....................................................................................................................................................2-12.1 DTE/DCE INTERCHANGE CIRCUITS...................................................................................................................2-12.2 COMMAND SYNTAX AND GUIDELINES..............................................................................................................2-12.2.1 DTE Commands......................................................................................................................................2-12.2.2 DTE Command Lines...............................................................................................................................2-12.3 AT COMMAND GUIDELINES ...............................................................................................................................2-12.3.1 Basic Command Syntax...........................................................................................................................2-12.3.2 Extended Command Syntax ....................................................................................................................2-13. AT COMMAND SET......................................................................................................................................................3-13.1 AT COMMAND GUIDELINES ...............................................................................................................................3-13.1.1 AT Commands, DTE Adaption.................................................................................................................3-13.1.2 AT Command Format ..............................................................................................................................3-13.1.3 Escape Code Sequence ..........................................................................................................................3-13.2 AT COMMAND SET .............................................................................................................................................3-23.2.1 AT Commands ........................................................................................................................................3-2A/ - Re-execute Command ...................................................................................................................3-2AT= x - Write to Selected S-Register ....................................................................................................3-2AT? - Read Selected S-Register ...........................................................................................................3-2A - Answer ...........................................................................................................................................3-2Bn - CCITT or Bell ................................................................................................................................3-2Cn - Carrier Control ..............................................................................................................................3-3Dn - Dial...............................................................................................................................................3-3En - Command Echo ............................................................................................................................3-4Fn - Select Line Modulation (RC144 Models Only) ................................................................................3-5Hn - Disconnect (Hang-Up)...................................................................................................................3-6In - Identification...................................................................................................................................3-6Ln - Speaker Volume............................................................................................................................3-6Mn - Speaker Control ...........................................................................................................................3-7Nn - Automode Enable .........................................................................................................................3-7On - Return to On-Line Data Mode.......................................................................................................3-7P - Set Pulse Dial Default .....................................................................................................................3-8Qn - Quiet Results Codes Control.........................................................................................................3-8Sn - Read/Write S-Register ..................................................................................................................3-8T - Set Tone Dial Default ......................................................................................................................3-9Vn - Result Code Form.........................................................................................................................3-9Wn - Connect Message Control............................................................................................................3-9Xn - Extended Result Codes...............................................................................................................3-10Yn - Long Space Disconnect...............................................................................................................3-13Zn - Soft Reset and Restore Profile ....................................................................................................3-133.2.2 AT& Commands ....................................................................................................................................3-14&Cn - RLSD (DCD) Option..................................................................................................................3-14&Dn - DTR Option ..............................................................................................................................3-14&Fn - Restore Factory Configuration (Profile)......................................................................................3-14&Gn - Select Guard Tone ...................................................................................................................3-15
AT Command Reference Manualvi 1048&Jn - Telephone Jack Control.............................................................................................................3-15&Kn - Flow Control .............................................................................................................................3-15&Ln - Leased Line Operation ..............................................................................................................3-15&Mn - Asynchronous/Synchronous Mode Selection ............................................................................3-16&Pn - Select Pulse Dial Make/Break Ratio ..........................................................................................3-16&Qn - Sync/Async Mode.....................................................................................................................3-17&Rn - RTS/CTS Option.......................................................................................................................3-18&Sn - DSR Override ...........................................................................................................................3-18&Tn - Test and Diagnostics.................................................................................................................3-18&V - Display Current Configuration and Stored Profiles.......................................................................3-193.2.3 &V1 - Display Last Connection Statistics................................................................................................3-19&Wn - Store Current Configuration .....................................................................................................3-20&Xn - Select Synchronous Clock Source.............................................................................................3-20&Yn - Designate a Default Reset Profile..............................................................................................3-20&Zn=x - Store Telephone Number ......................................................................................................3-203.2.4 AT% Commands ...................................................................................................................................3-21%En - Enable/Disable Line Quality Monitor and Auto-Retrain or Fallback/Fall Forward ........................3-21%L - Line Signal Level........................................................................................................................ 3-21%Q - Line Signal Quality..................................................................................................................... 3-21%7 - Plug and Play Serial Number......................................................................................................3-22%8 - Plug and Play Vendor ID and Product Number............................................................................ 3-223.2.5 AT\ Commands .....................................................................................................................................3-23\Kn - Break Control.............................................................................................................................3-23\Nn - Operating Mode.........................................................................................................................3-24\Vn - Single Line Connect Message Enable.........................................................................................3-243.2.6 AT+ Commands ....................................................................................................................................3-25+MS - Select Modulation..................................................................................................................... 3-25+Hn - Enable/Disable RPI and DTE Speed..........................................................................................3-283.2.7 AT** Command .....................................................................................................................................3-29** - Download to Flash Memory ..........................................................................................................3-293.2.8 AT- Commands .....................................................................................................................................3-30-SDR=n - Enable/Disable Distinctive Ring ...........................................................................................3-303.3 ERROR DETECTION AND DATA COMPRESSION COMMANDS.......................................................................3-313.3.1 AT% Commands ...................................................................................................................................3-31%C - Enable/Disable Data Compression.............................................................................................3-313.3.2 AT\ Commands .....................................................................................................................................3-31\An - Select Maximum MNP Block Size...............................................................................................3-31\Bn - Transmit Break to Remote..........................................................................................................3-313.4 MNP 10 COMMANDS.........................................................................................................................................3-323.4.1 AT) Commands .....................................................................................................................................3-32)Mn - Enable Cellular Power Level Adjustment....................................................................................3-32*Hn - Link Negotiation Speed..............................................................................................................3-32-Kn - MNP Extended Services ............................................................................................................3-32-Qn - Enable Fallback to V.22 bis/V.22......................................................................................... .......3-32-SEC=n - Enable/Disable MNP10-EC..................................................................................................3-33@Mn - Initial Cellular Power Level Setting...........................................................................................3-33:E - Compromise Equalizer Enable Command.....................................................................................3-333.5 W-CLASS COMMANDS......................................................................................................................................3-343.5.1 AT* Commands.....................................................................................................................................3-34*B - Display Blacklisted Numbers........................................................................................................3-34*D - Display Delayed Numbers............................................................................................................3-34*NCn - Country Select ........................................................................................................................3-353.6 CALLER ID COMMANDS ...................................................................................................................................3-363.6.1 AT#CID Command ................................................................................................................................3-36#CIDn - Caller ID................................................................................................................................3-36Inquiries .............................................................................................................................................3-36Formatted Form Reporting..................................................................................................................3-36
AT Command Reference Manual1048 viiExample of Formatted Form Reporting ...............................................................................................3-37Unformatted Form Reporting ..............................................................................................................3-37Example of Unformatted Form Reporting............................................................................................3-373.7 CELLULAR COMMANDS....................................................................................................................................3-383.7.1 Cellular Phone Drivers ........................................................................................................................... 3-383.7.2 Cellular Commands ...............................................................................................................................3-38^C2 - Download Cellular Phone Driver ................................................................................................3-38^I - Identify Cellular Phone Driver........................................................................................................3-38^T6 - Indicate Status of Cellular Phone ...............................................................................................3-393.7.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................3-39Modem Configuration .........................................................................................................................3-39Fax Configuration ...............................................................................................................................3-40Cellular Phone Configuration ..............................................................................................................3-403.8 AT COMMAND RESULT CODES .......................................................................................................................3-42OK (0) 3-42CONNECT (1) ....................................................................................................................................3-42RING (2) ............................................................................................................................................3-42NO CARRIER (3)................................................................................................................................3-42ERROR (4).........................................................................................................................................3-42CONNECT 1200 (5)............................................................................................................................3-42NO DIALTONE (6)..............................................................................................................................3-42BUSY (7)............................................................................................................................................3-43NO ANSWER (8)................................................................................................................................3-43CONNECT 0600 (9)............................................................................................................................3-43CONNECT 2400 (10)..........................................................................................................................3-43CONNECT 4800 (11)..........................................................................................................................3-43CONNECT 9600 (12)..........................................................................................................................3-43CONNECT 7200 (13)..........................................................................................................................3-43CONNECT 12000 (14)........................................................................................................................ 3-43CONNECT 14400 (15)........................................................................................................................ 3-43CONNECT 19200 (16)........................................................................................................................ 3-43CONNECT 38400 (17)........................................................................................................................ 3-44CONNECT 57600 (18)........................................................................................................................ 3-44CONNECT 115200 (19)...................................................................................................................... 3-44CONNECT 75TX/1200RX (22)............................................................................................................3-44CONNECT 1200TX/75RX (23)............................................................................................................3-44DELAYED (24) ...................................................................................................................................3-44BLACKLISTED (32)............................................................................................................................3-44FAX (33).............................................................................................................................................3-44DATA (35)..........................................................................................................................................3-44CARRIER 300 (40) .............................................................................................................................3-44CARRIER 1200/75 (44) ......................................................................................................................3-44CARRIER 75/1200 (45) ......................................................................................................................3-44CARRIER 1200 (46) ...........................................................................................................................3-44CARRIER 2400 (47) ...........................................................................................................................3-44CARRIER 4800 (48) ...........................................................................................................................3-44CARRIER 7200 (49) ...........................................................................................................................3-45CARRIER 9600 (50) ...........................................................................................................................3-45CARRIER 12000 (51) .........................................................................................................................3-45CARRIER 14400 (52) .........................................................................................................................3-45CARRIER 16800 (53) .........................................................................................................................3-45CARRIER 19200 (54) .........................................................................................................................3-45CARRIER 21600 (55) .........................................................................................................................3-45CARRIER 24000 (56) .........................................................................................................................3-45CARRIER 26400 (57) .........................................................................................................................3-45CARRIER 28800 (58) .........................................................................................................................3-45CONNECT 16800 (59)........................................................................................................................ 3-45CONNECT 21600 (61)........................................................................................................................ 3-45CONNECT 24000 (62)........................................................................................................................ 3-45
AT Command Reference Manualviii 1048CONNECT 26400 (63)........................................................................................................................3-45CONNECT 28800 (64)........................................................................................................................ 3-46COMPRESSION: CLASS 5 (66) .........................................................................................................3-46COMPRESSION: V.42 bis (67)...........................................................................................................3-46COMPRESSION: NONE (69) .............................................................................................................3-46PROTOCOL: NONE (70)....................................................................................................................3-46PROTOCOL: LAPM (77) ....................................................................................................................3-46CARRIER 31200 (78) .........................................................................................................................3-46CARRIER 33600 (79) .........................................................................................................................3-46PROTOCOL: ALT (80)........................................................................................................................3-46PROTOCOL: ALT-CELLULAR (81).....................................................................................................3-46CONNECT 33600 (84)........................................................................................................................ 3-46CONNECT 31200 (91)........................................................................................................................ 3-46CARRIER 32000 (150) ....................................................................................................................... 3-46CARRIER 34000 (151) ....................................................................................................................... 3-46CARRIER 36000 (152) ....................................................................................................................... 3-47CARRIER 38000 (153) ....................................................................................................................... 3-47CARRIER 40000 (154) ....................................................................................................................... 3-47CARRIER 42000 (155) ....................................................................................................................... 3-47CARRIER 44000 (156) ....................................................................................................................... 3-47CARRIER 46000 (157) ....................................................................................................................... 3-47CARRIER 48000 (158) ....................................................................................................................... 3-47CARRIER 50000 (159) ....................................................................................................................... 3-47CARRIER 52000 (160) ....................................................................................................................... 3-47CARRIER 54000 (161) ....................................................................................................................... 3-47CARRIER 56000 (162) ....................................................................................................................... 3-47CONNECT 32000 (165)...................................................................................................................... 3-47CONNECT 34000 (166)...................................................................................................................... 3-47CONNECT 36000 (167)...................................................................................................................... 3-47CONNECT 38000 (168)...................................................................................................................... 3-48CONNECT 40000 (169)...................................................................................................................... 3-48CONNECT 42000 (170)...................................................................................................................... 3-48CONNECT 44000 (171)...................................................................................................................... 3-48CONNECT 46000 (172)...................................................................................................................... 3-48CONNECT 48000 (173)...................................................................................................................... 3-48CONNECT 50000 (174)...................................................................................................................... 3-48CONNECT 52000 (175)...................................................................................................................... 3-48CONNECT 54000 (176)...................................................................................................................... 3-48CONNECT 56000 (177)...................................................................................................................... 3-48CONNECT 230400 (20)...................................................................................................................... 3-48+FCERROR (+F4) ..............................................................................................................................3-483.9 AUDIOSPAN AND DSVD COMMANDS ..............................................................................................................3-493.9.1 Commands Supported by Both AudioSpan and DSVD ...........................................................................3-49-SMS= x, y, z, t - Select AudioSpan/DSVD Mode................................................................................3-49#VLS = x - Voice Line Select...............................................................................................................3-503.9.2 Commands Supported Only by DSVD....................................................................................................3-50-SSE= x - Enable/Disable DSVD.........................................................................................................3-503.9.3 Commands Supported Only by AudioSpan ............................................................................................3-51-SQS= x, y - Select AudioSpan Modulation .........................................................................................3-513.9.4 Examples ..............................................................................................................................................3-533.10 SYNCHRONOUS ACCESS MODE ...................................................................................................................3-583.10.1 Synchronous Access Mode Commands ...............................................................................................3-58+ES - Enable Synchronous Access Mode ...........................................................................................3-58+ESA - Configure Synchronous Access Submode...............................................................................3-59+ ITF - Transmit Flow Control Thresholds ...........................................................................................3-614. S-REGISTERS ..............................................................................................................................................................4-14.1 FACTORY DEFAULTS .........................................................................................................................................4-14.2 S-REGISTER DEFINITIONS.................................................................................................................................4-4
AT Command Reference Manual1048 ixS0 - Number of Rings to Auto-Answer ..................................................................................................4-4S1 - Ring Counter.................................................................................................................................4-4S2 - Escape Character .........................................................................................................................4-4S3 - Carriage Return Character ............................................................................................................4-4S4 - Line Feed Character......................................................................................................................4-4S5 - Backspace Character....................................................................................................................4-4S6 - Wait Time for Dial Tone Before Blind Dialing, or After “W” Dial Modifier (W-Class Models).............4-5S7 - Wait Time For Carrier After Dial, For Silence, or For Dial Tone After “W” Dial Modifier (US Models)4-5S8 - Pause Time For Dial Delay............................................................................................................4-5S9 - Carrier Detect Response Time ......................................................................................................4-5S10 - Lost Carrier To Hang Up Delay....................................................................................................4-5S11 - DTMF Tone Duration...................................................................................................................4-5S12 - Escape Prompt Delay (EPD) .......................................................................................................4-6S13 - Reserved ....................................................................................................................................4-6S14 - General Bit Mapped Options Status.............................................................................................4-6S15 - Reserved ....................................................................................................................................4-6S16 - General Bit Mapped Test Options Status.....................................................................................4-7S17 - Reserved ....................................................................................................................................4-7S18 - Test Timer...................................................................................................................................4-7S19 - AutoSync Bit Mapped Options.....................................................................................................4-8S20 - AutoSync HDLC Address or BSC Sync Character........................................................................4-8S21 - V.24/General Bit Mapped Options Status.....................................................................................4-9S22 - Speaker/Results Bit Mapped Options Status..............................................................................4-10S23 - General Bit Mapped Options Status...........................................................................................4-11S24 - Sleep Inactivity Timer ................................................................................................................4-11S25 - Delay To DTR ...........................................................................................................................4-11S26 - RTS to CTS Delay.....................................................................................................................4-11S27 - Bit Mapped Options Status........................................................................................................4-12S28 - Bit Mapped Options Status........................................................................................................4-13S29 - Flash Dial Modifier Time............................................................................................................4-13S30 - Disconnect Inactivity Timer........................................................................................................4-13S31 - Bit Mapped Options Status........................................................................................................4-14S32 - XON Character .........................................................................................................................4-14S33 - XOFF Character........................................................................................................................4-14S34-S35 - Reserved........................................................................................................................... 4-14S36 - LAPM Failure Control ................................................................................................................4-15S37 - Desired Line Connection Speed.................................................................................................4-16S38 - Delay Before Forced Hang Up...................................................................................................4-17S39 - Flow Control Bit Mapped Options Status....................................................................................4-17S40 - General Bit Mapped Options Status...........................................................................................4-18S41 - General Bit Mapped Options Status...........................................................................................4-19S46 - Data Compression Control ........................................................................................................4-19S48 - V.42 Negotiation Action.............................................................................................................4-19S82 - Break Handling Options.............................................................................................................4-20S86 - Call Failure Reason Code..........................................................................................................4-20S91 - PSTN Transmit Attenuation Level..............................................................................................4-20S92 - Fax Transmit Attenuation Level .................................................................................................4-20S95 - Extended Result Codes.............................................................................................................4-215. FAX CLASS 1 COMMANDS .........................................................................................................................................5-15.1 FAX I/O PROCESSING ........................................................................................................................................5-15.1.1 DTE-to-Modem Transmit Data Stream.....................................................................................................5-15.1.2 Modem-to-DTE Receive Data Stream......................................................................................................5-15.1.3 Fax Mode Selection.................................................................................................................................5-15.1.4 Fax Origination ........................................................................................................................................5-15.1.5 Fax Answering.........................................................................................................................................5-25.1.6 Fax Control Transmission ........................................................................................................................5-25.1.7 Fax Control Reception .............................................................................................................................5-25.1.8 Fax Data Transmission............................................................................................................................5-3
AT Command Reference Manualx10485.1.9 Fax Data Reception.................................................................................................................................5-35.2 COMMANDS ........................................................................................................................................................5-4+FCLASS=n - Select Service Class ......................................................................................................5-4+F<command>? - Report Active Configuration......................................................................................5-4+F<command>=? - Report Operating Capabilities.................................................................................5-4+FAE=n - Data/Fax Auto Answer..........................................................................................................5-4+FTS=n - Stop Transmission and Wait..................................................................................................5-4+FRS=n - Receive Silence....................................................................................................................5-4+FTM=n - Transmit Data ......................................................................................................................5-5+FRM=n - Receive Data .......................................................................................................................5-5+FTH=n - Transmit Data with HDLC Framing........................................................................................5-6+FRH=n - Receive Data with HDLC Framing.........................................................................................5-65.3 EXAMPLES ..........................................................................................................................................................5-66. FAX CLASS 2 COMMANDS .........................................................................................................................................6-16.1 COMMAND SYNTAX AND GUIDELINES..............................................................................................................6-16.1.1 DTE Commands......................................................................................................................................6-1DTE Command Lines ...........................................................................................................................6-1Facsimile Command Syntax .................................................................................................................6-16.1.2 Serial Port Speed and Flow Control .........................................................................................................6-3Data Stream Termination......................................................................................................................6-3DTE to DCE Streams............................................................................................................................6-3DCE to DTE Streams............................................................................................................................6-36.1.3 Auto Answer............................................................................................................................................6-36.1.4 Identification of T.30 Options ...................................................................................................................6-36.1.5 Session Status Reporting.........................................................................................................................6-46.1.6 Procedure Interrupt Negotiation ...............................................................................................................6-46.2 SERVICE CLASS 2 IDENTIFICATION AND SELECTION......................................................................................6-46.2.1 +FMFR?, Request Manufacturer Identification .........................................................................................6-46.2.2 +FMDL?, Identify Product Model..............................................................................................................6-46.2.3 +FREV?, Identify Product Revision ..........................................................................................................6-46.3 SERVICE CLASS 2 ACTION COMMANDS ...........................................................................................................6-46.3.1 ATD, Originate a Call...............................................................................................................................6-56.3.2 ATA, Answer a Call..................................................................................................................................6-5Manual Call Answer..............................................................................................................................6-5Automatic Answer.................................................................................................................................6-5Connection as a Data Modem...............................................................................................................6-56.3.3 +FDT, Data Transmission ........................................................................................................................6-6Initiate Page Transmission....................................................................................................................6-6Continue a Page...................................................................................................................................6-6Phase C Data Framing .........................................................................................................................6-6Phase C Data Format...........................................................................................................................6-6<CAN>, Escape from Transmission ......................................................................................................6-66.3.4 +FET, Transmit Page Punctuation ...........................................................................................................6-8End a Page ..........................................................................................................................................6-86.3.5 +FDR, Begin or Continue Phase C Receive Data .....................................................................................6-9Initiate Document Reception.................................................................................................................6-9Continue Document Reception ...........................................................................................................6-10Phase C Data Framing .......................................................................................................................6-10Phase C Data Format.........................................................................................................................6-10<CAN>, Escape from Reception .........................................................................................................6-106.3.6 +FK, Session Termination......................................................................................................................6-106.3.7 +FCIG, Set Polling ID ............................................................................................................................6-116.3.8 +FLPL, Indicate a Document for Polling .................................................................................................6-116.3.9 +FSPL, Enable Polling........................................................................................................................... 6-116.4 SERVICE CLASS 2 DCE RESPONSES ..............................................................................................................6-13
AT Command Reference Manual1048 xi6.4.1 +FCON, Facsimile Connection Response ..............................................................................................6-136.4.2 +FDCS:, Report Current Session Capabilities ........................................................................................6-136.4.3 +FDIS:, Report Remote Station Capabilities...........................................................................................6-136.4.4 +FCFR, Indicate Confirmation to Receive ..............................................................................................6-136.4.5 +FTSI:, Report the Transmit Station ID ..................................................................................................6-136.4.6 +FCSI:, Report the Called Station ID......................................................................................................6-136.4.7 +FPTS:, Receive Page Transfer Status..................................................................................................6-146.4.8 +FET:, Post Page Message Response...................................................................................................6-146.4.9 +FPTS:, Transmit Page Transfer Status.................................................................................................6-146.4.10 +FHNG:, Call Termination with Status..................................................................................................6-146.4.11 +FCIG:, Report the Polled Station ID ...................................................................................................6-156.4.12 +FDTC:, Report the Polled Station Capabilities ....................................................................................6-156.4.13 +FPOLL, Indicate Polling Request........................................................................................................6-156.5 SERVICE CLASS 2 PARAMETERS....................................................................................................................6-166.5.1 +FDCC, DCE Capabilities Parameters ...................................................................................................6-166.5.2 +FDIS, Current Sessions Capabilities Parameters..................................................................................6-166.5.3 +FDCS, Current Session Results Parameters ........................................................................................6-176.5.4 +FLID=, Local ID String .........................................................................................................................6-186.5.5 +FCR, Capability to Receive ..................................................................................................................6-186.5.6 +FPTS=, Page Transfer Status..............................................................................................................6-186.5.7 +FCQ, Copy Quality Checking ...............................................................................................................6-186.5.8 +FPHCTO, DTE Phase C Response Time-out .......................................................................................6-186.5.9 +FAXERR, T.30 Session Error Report ...................................................................................................6-196.5.10 +FBOR, Data Bit Order........................................................................................................................6-196.5.11 +FAA, Answer Parameter ....................................................................................................................6-196.5.12 +FBUF?, Buffer Size............................................................................................................................6-206.6 EXAMPLE SESSIONS........................................................................................................................................6-207. VOICE/AUDIO COMMANDS.........................................................................................................................................7-17.1 VOICE/AUDIO SUBMODES .................................................................................................................................7-17.1.1 Online Voice Command Mode .................................................................................................................7-17.1.2 Voice Receive Mode................................................................................................................................7-17.1.3 Voice Transmit Mode...............................................................................................................................7-27.2 VOICE/AUDIO CAPABILITIES..............................................................................................................................7-27.2.1 Call Establishment - Originate..................................................................................................................7-2Directed Originate (Dial as a specific modem type) ...............................................................................7-2Adaptive Originate (Dial with Voice/Data/Fax Discrimination).................................................................7-27.2.2 Call Establishment - Answer ....................................................................................................................7-3Directed Answer (Answer as a specific modem type) ............................................................................7-3Adaptive Answer (Answer with Voice/Data/Fax Discrimination)..............................................................7-37.2.3 Voice/Audio Data Transfer.......................................................................................................................7-47.2.4 Tone and Status Monitoring  Shielded <DLE> Statuses............................................................................7-47.2.5 Shielded <DLE> Commands from the DTE ..............................................................................................7-67.2.6 Voice Record...........................................................................................................................................7-87.2.7 Voice Playback........................................................................................................................................7-8Volume Adjustment During Record .......................................................................................................7-8Volume Adjustment During Playback ....................................................................................................7-87.2.8 Voice Call Termination.............................................................................................................................7-9Local Disconnect ..................................................................................................................................7-9Remote Disconnect Detection...............................................................................................................7-97.2.9 Mode Switching .......................................................................................................................................7-9Voice to Fax .........................................................................................................................................7-9Unsuccessful Fax Connection Attempt to Voice ....................................................................................7-9
AT Command Reference Manualxii 1048Voice to Data........................................................................................................................................7-9Unsuccessful Data Connection Attempt to Voice...................................................................................7-97.2.10 Caller ID ................................................................................................................................................7-97.3 AT VOICE COMMAND SUMMARY.....................................................................................................................7-107.3.1 Global AT Command Set Extensions .....................................................................................................7-10ATA - Answering in Voice/Audio..........................................................................................................7-11ATD - Dial Command in Voice/Audio...................................................................................................7-11ATH - Hang Up in Voice/Audio............................................................................................................7-11ATZ - Reset from Voice Mode.............................................................................................................7-12#BDR - Select Baud Rate (Turn off Autobaud) ....................................................................................7-12#CID -  Enable Caller ID Detection and Select Reporting Format.........................................................7-12#CLS - Select Data, Fax, or Voice/Audio.............................................................................................7-14#MDL? - Identify Model.......................................................................................................................7-14#MFR? - Identify Manufacturer ...........................................................................................................7-14#REV? - Identify Revision Level..........................................................................................................7-147.3.2 AT#V Commands Enabled Only in Voice Mode (#CLS=8) ......................................................................7-15#TL- Audio Output Transmit Level ......................................................................................................7-15#VBQ? - Query Buffer Size.................................................................................................................7-15#VBS - Bits Per Sample......................................................................................................................7-15#VBT - Beep Tone Timer....................................................................................................................7-16#VCI? - Identify Compression Method.................................................................................................7-16#VLS - Voice Line Select .................................................................................................................... 7-17#VRA - Ringback Goes Away Timer (Originate) ..................................................................................7-19#VRN - Ringback Never Came Timer (Originate) ................................................................................7-19#VRX - Voice Receive ........................................................................................................................7-19#VSD - Enable Silence Deletion (Voice Receive) [ADPCM] .................................................................7-20#VSK - Buffer Skid Setting.................................................................................................................. 7-20#VSP - Silence Detection Period (Voice Receive) [ADPCM] ................................................................7-21#VSR - Sampling Rate Selection.........................................................................................................7-21#VSS - Silence Detection Tuner (Voice Receive) [ADPCM] .................................................................7-22#VTD - DTMF Tone Reporting ............................................................................................................7-23#VTM - Enable Timing Mark Placement ..............................................................................................7-24#VTS - Generate Tone Signals (Online Voice Command) ...................................................................7-24#VTX - Voice Transmit........................................................................................................................ 7-25#VGT - Set Playback Volume in the Command State.......................................................................... 7-25<DLE><u> and <DLE><d> - Set Playback Volume in the Data State...................................................7-257.3.3 Speakerphone Commands ....................................................................................................................7-25Originating a Call in Speakerphone Mode ...........................................................................................7-26Answering a Call in Speakerphone Mode............................................................................................7-26Muting the Local Handset During Phone Conversation - Music on Hold...............................................7-26Recording a Handset Conversation on the Phone Line........................................................................7-27Recording/Playback from Handset through Sound Chip ......................................................................7-27#SPK Parameter ................................................................................................................................7-27Room Monitor.....................................................................................................................................7-29Switching Between #VLS Settings.......................................................................................................7-29Reporting of Local Handset Status......................................................................................................7-297.3.4 Using VoiceView with Speakerphone, Headset, and Handset modes......................................................7-30Using Modem as Dialer Prior to VoiceView Mode................................................................................7-317.4 S-REGISTERS ...................................................................................................................................................7-32S30 - Disconnect Inactivity Timer........................................................................................................7-327.5 RESULT CODES FOR VOICE OPERATION.......................................................................................................7-327.6 EXAMPLES OF VOICE OPERATION .................................................................................................................7-328. AT COMMAND SET SUMMARY...................................................................................................................................8-18.1 BASIC AT COMMANDS........................................................................................................................................8-18.2 ECC COMMANDS................................................................................................................................................8-48.3 MNP 10 COMMANDS...........................................................................................................................................8-5
AT Command Reference Manual1048 xiii8.4 W-CLASS COMMANDS........................................................................................................................................8-58.5 CALLER ID COMMANDS .....................................................................................................................................8-58.6 FAX CLASS 1.......................................................................................................................................................8-58.7 FAX CLASS 2.......................................................................................................................................................8-68.8 VOICE/AUDIO COMMANDS.................................................................................................................................8-78.9 CELLULAR COMMANDS......................................................................................................................................8-78.10 AUDIOSPAN AND DSVD COMMANDS ..............................................................................................................8-78.11 SYNCHRONOUS ACCESS MODE COMMANDS................................................................................................8-79. COMMON CONFIGURATION SETUP STRINGS ..........................................................................................................9-1
AT Command Reference Manualxiv 1048List of TablesTable 3-1. Result Codes ..................................................................................................................................................3-11Table 3-2. Remote Modem Configuration and Resulting Transmit Levels .........................................................................3-41Table 4-1. S-Register Summary.........................................................................................................................................4-2Table 5-1. Fax Class 1 Commands....................................................................................................................................5-1Table 5-2. Fax Class 1 Calling Sequence (One Page)........................................................................................................5-7Table 5-3. Fax Class 1 Answering Sequence (One Page) ..................................................................................................5-8Table 6-1. Fax Class 2 Commands....................................................................................................................................6-2Table 6-2. T.30 Session Subparameter Codes...................................................................................................................6-7Table 6-3. T.30 Post Page Message Codes.......................................................................................................................6-8Table 6-4. T.30 Post Page Response Messages................................................................................................................6-8Table 6-5. Hang Up Status Codes ...................................................................................................................................6-12Table 6-6. Send Two Pages, 1-D, No Errors ....................................................................................................................6-21Table 6-7. Receive Two Pages, 1-D Data, No Errors........................................................................................................6-22Table 7-1. DTE Speeds .....................................................................................................................................................7-4Table 7-2. Codes Sent to the DTE .....................................................................................................................................7-5Table 7-3. Shielded DTE Codes.........................................................................................................................................7-7Table 7-4. AT Voice Commands ......................................................................................................................................7-10Table 7-5. Device Types Supported by #VLS...................................................................................................................7-18Table 7-6. #VTD Tone Detection/Reporting Bit Settings ...................................................................................................7-23Table 7-7. Record a Greeting Message ...........................................................................................................................7-33Table 7-8. Playback a Greeting Message.........................................................................................................................7-35Table 7-9. Answer Call/Play Greeting/Record Message ...................................................................................................7-36Table 7-10. Call/Record Message/Receive Fax................................................................................................................7-38Table 7-11. Answer Call, Determine It's a Fax..................................................................................................................7-40Table 7-12. Adaptive Fax/Data/Voice; Determine Data.....................................................................................................7-41Table 7-13. Originate a Call, Send Answerer a Message..................................................................................................7-42List of FiguresFigure 6-1. T.30 Session Parameter Relationships...........................................................................................................6-16
AT Command Reference Manual1048 1-11. INTRODUCTION1.1 OVERVIEWThis manual describes the AT commands for the following Rockwell modem families:RC56ACiRCV56ACFL/SPRCV56ACF/SPRCV56ACF/SVDRC336ACiRC336ACLRC336ACFL/SPRCV336ACi/SPRCV336ACF/SPRCV336ACF/SVDRC288ACiRC288ACLRC288ACLW-GSMRCV288ACi/SPRC144ACi and RC144ATiRC144ACL and RC144ATLRC144ACGRC144ACF/ATFRC144ACFL/ATFLRCV144ACi/SPRCV144ACF/SPThe descriptions apply to all these modems with any differences between modem product families noted. Refer to ModemFirmware Release notes for commands applicable to modem firmware.ATi, ATL, ATF, and ATFL models support error correction and data compression (ECC) performed by the host CPU andcommunications software for Windows using the enhanced Rockwell Windows Protocol Interface (RPI or RPI+™) andWinRPI host software module.1.1.1 Command SyntaxThe fundamental DTE interface command syntax is described in Section 2.1.1.2 Command DescriptionsThese commands are grouped into the following categories:AT commands Section 3S-Registers Section 4Fax Class 1 commands Section 5Fax Class 2 commands Section 6Voice/Audio commands Section 7AT Command Summary Section 8The AT commands are implemented in microcontroller (MCU) firmware for specific modem models. The support for acommand category is identified by modem model in the modem designer's guide. Additional configuration andimplementation information is available in release notes and/or readme files that accompany MCU firmware release.
AT Command Reference Manual1-2 10481.1.3  Call Progress and Blacklisting ParametersThe modem MCU firmware may be provided either in reconfigurable form or preconfigured form. Consult the specificfirmware release notes for exact configuration information.Reconfigurable Form. The modem MCU firmware can be configured for operation in specific countries by the PC-compatible ConfigurACE II program. The call progress and blacklisting parameters described in the ConfigurACE II User'sManual can be altered and loaded for a number of countries by this program.Preconfigured Form. Specific MCU firmware configurations may be released that can be directly installed without requiringthe use of ConfigurACE II.1.1.4  ConfigurACE II for Windows Utility ProgramThe PC-based ConfigurACE II for Windows utility program allows the OEM to customize the modem firmware to suit specificapplication and country requirements. ConfigurACE II for Windows allows programming of functions such as:Loading of multiple sets of country parametersLoading of NVRAM factory profilesCall progress and blacklisting parametersEntry of S register maximum/minimum valuesLimitation of transmit levelsModification of factory default valuesCustomization of the ATI4 responseCustomization of fax OEM messagesThis program modifies the hex object code which can be programmed directly into the system EPROM. Lists of thegenerated parameters can be displayed or printed.Rockwell-provided country parameter files allow a complete set of country-specific call progress and blacklisting parametersto be selected.Refer to the ConfigurACE II for Windows software for a detailed description of capabilities and the operating procedure.1.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTATIONRC144ACF and RC144ATF Modem Designer's Guide (Order No. 1055)RC144ACF/ASVD and RCV288ACF/ASVD Modem Designer’s Guide (Order No. 1082)RC144ACF/SP and RC144ATF Modem Designer's Guide (Order No. 1046)RC144ACG Modem Designer's Guide (Order No. 1108)RC144ACi and RC144ACL Modem Designer's Guide (Order No. 876)RC144ATi and RC144ATL Modem Designer's Guide (Order No. 897)RC288ACi and RC288ACL Modem Designer's Guide (Order No. 1027)RC288ACL/SVD SP Modem Designer’s Guide (Order No. 1096)RCV336ACL Modem Designer’s Guide (Order No. 1121)RCV56ACF/SP, RCV336ACF/SP, and RC288ACF/SP Modem Designer’s Guide (Order No. 1046)RCV56ACF/SVD and RCV336ACF/SVD Modem Designer’s Guide (Order No. 1105)RCV336ACFL/SVD Modem Designer’s Guide (Order No. 1062)RCV56ACFL/SVD and RCV336ACFL/SVD Modem Designer’s Guide (Order No. 1121)RCV56ACi and RCV336ACi Modem Designer’s Guide (Order No. 1117)
AT Command Reference Manual1048 2-12. COMMAND SYNTAX2.1  DTE/DCE INTERCHANGE CIRCUITSCommunication between the DTE and modem is half duplex (i.e., only one entity 'talks' at a time).2.2  COMMAND SYNTAX AND GUIDELINES2.2.1 DTE CommandsThe ISO 646 character set (CCITT T.50 International Alphabet 5, American Standard Code for Information Interchange) isused for the issuance of commands and responses. Only the low-order 7 bits of each character are used for commands orparameters; the high-order bit is ignored. Upper case characters are equivalent to lower case characters.2.2.2  DTE Command LinesA command line is a string of characters sent from a DTE to the DCE while the DCE is in a command state. Command lineshave a prefix, a body, and a terminator. The prefix consists of the ASCII characters “AT” (065, 084) or “at” (097, 116). Thebody is a string of commands restricted to printable ASCII characters (032 - 126). Space characters (ASCII 032) and controlcharacters other than carriage return <CR> (default value = ASCII 013 = 0Dh, see register S3), backspace <BS> (defaultvalue = ASCII 008 = 08h, see register S5), and cancel <cntrl-x> (ASCII 024 = 18h) in the command string are ignored. Thedefault terminator is the <CR> character. Characters that precede the AT prefix are ignored.2.3  AT COMMAND GUIDELINESModem operation is controlled by generic AT commands. These AT commands may be basic AT (i.e., commands precededby AT, AT&, AT%, AT*, AT\, AT), AT-, or AT#), S-Register (e.g., S6=n), Fax class 1 (e.g., +FTM), Fax class 2 (e.g.,+FDCS:), or voice (e.g., #VBS) commands. The command syntax and operation guidelines governing each of thesecommand categories are described in subsequent sections.2.3.1  Basic Command SyntaxCharacters within the command line are parsed as commands with associated parameter values. The basic commandsconsist of single ASCII characters, or single characters preceded by a prefix character, followed by a decimal parameter(e.g., “&D1"). Missing decimal parameters are evaluated as 0.2.3.2  Extended Command SyntaxThe facsimile commands use extended syntax. They are preceded by the “+F” characters, and they are terminated by thesemicolon “:” character (ASCII 059) or by the <CR> that terminates the command line.
AT Command Reference Manual2-2 1048This page is intentionally blank.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 3-13. AT COMMAND SET3.1  AT COMMAND GUIDELINESThe basic AT commands used to control modem operation are defined in this section. These commands are summarized inAppendix A. All these commands may not be available in a specific product depending upon supported data rates andmodes. The default values are typical of a fully configured modem supporting all data rates and options. The actual defaultvalue is dependent upon modem firmware as defined by the firmware release notes.3.1.1  AT Commands, DTE AdaptionUnder AT operation, the serial interfaced modem performs an autobaud/autoparity/autolength function on each AT headerentered. The autolength/autoparity facility can detect 7- or 8-bit characters of even, odd, or no parity with one stop bit. This isnot necessary for the parallel interfaced modem since it has direct access to the UART registers.3.1.2  AT Command FormatA command line is a string of characters sent from a DTE to the modem (DCE) while the modem is in a command state. Acommand line has a prefix, a body, and a terminator. Each command line (with the exception of the A/ command) mustbegin with the character sequence AT and must be terminated by a carriage return. Commands entered in upper case orlower case are accepted, but both the A and T must be of the same case, i.e., "AT" = ASCII 065, 084 or “at” = ASCII 097,116. The body is a string of commands restricted to printable ASCII characters (032 - 126). Space characters (ASCII 032)and control characters other than CR (ASCII 013) and BS (ASCII 010) in the command string are ignored. The defaultterminator is the ASCII <CR> character. Characters that precede the AT prefix are ignored. The command line interpretationbegins upon receipt of the carriage return character.Characters within the command line are parsed as commands with associated parameter values. The basic commandsconsist of single ASCII characters, or single characters preceded by a prefix character (e.g., “&"), followed by a decimalparameter. Missing decimal parameters are evaluated as 0.The modem supports the editing of command lines by recognizing a backspace character. When modem echo is enabled,the modem responds to receipt of a backspace or delete by echoing a backspace character, a space character, and anotherbackspace. The hex value to be used for the backspace character is programmable through register S5. Values equal to 0or greater than 127, or the value which corresponds to the carriage return character, cannot be used for the backspacecharacter. This editing is not applicable to the AT header of a command. A command line may be aborted at any time byentering < cntrl-x > (18h).The AT sequence may be followed by any number of commands in sequence, except for commands such as Z, D, or A.Commands following commands Z, D, or A on the same command line will be ignored. The maximum number of characterson any command line is 39 (including "A" and "T"). If a syntax error is found anywhere in a command line command, theremainder of the line will be ignored and the ERROR result code will be returned.Most commands entered with parameters out of range will not be accepted and the ERROR response will be returned to theDTE.Commands will only be accepted by the modem once the previous command has been fully executed, which is normallyindicated by the return of an appropriate result code. Execution of commands D and A, either as a result of a directcommand or a re-execute command, will be aborted if another character is entered before completion of the handshake.3.1.3  Escape Code SequenceWhen the modem has established a connection and has entered on-line data mode, it is possible to break into the datatransmission in order to issue further commands to the modem in an on-line command mode. This is achieved by the DTEsending to the modem a sequence of three ASCII characters specified by register S2. The default character is '+'. Themaximum time allowed between receipt of the last character of the three escape character sequence from the DTE andsending of the OK result code to the DTE is controlled by the S12 register.
AT Command Reference Manual3-2 10483.2  AT COMMAND SETThe modem will respond to the commands detailed below. Parameters applicable to each command are listed with thecommand description. The defaults shown for each configuration command are those used in the Rockwell factory profile 0.3.2.1 AT CommandsA/ - Re-execute CommandThe modem behaves as though the last command line had been re-sent by the DTE. "A/" will repeat all the commands in thecommand buffer.The principal application of this command is to place another call (using the Dial command) that failed to connect due to abusy line, no answer, or a wrong number. This command must appear alone on a command line. This command should notbe terminated by a carriage return.AT= x - Write to Selected S-RegisterThis command writes the value x to the currently selected S-Register. An S-Register can be selected by using the ATSncommand. All of the S-Registers will return the OK response if x is a number. Some registers may not be written due tocountry specific PTT limitations.Result CodesOK For all arguments.AT? - Read Selected S-RegisterThis command reads and displays the selected S-Register. An S-Register can be selected by using the ATSn command.Result Codes:OK For all arguments.A - AnswerThe modem will go off-hook and attempt to answer an incoming call if correct conditions are met. Upon successfulcompletion of answer handshake, the modem will go on-line in answer mode. This command may be affected by the state ofLine Current Sense, if enabled. (Most countries do not require Line Current Sense.) Operation is also dependent upon+FCLASS command and country-specific requirements.If +FCLASS=0 is selected, the modem will enter the connect state after exchanging carrier with the remote modem. If nocarrier is detected within a period specified in register S7, the modem hangs up. Any character entered during the connectsequence will abort the connection attempt.If +FCLASS=1 or 2 is selected, the modem will go off-hook in V.21 answer mode. It will generate the V.21 2100 Hz answertone for 3 ± 0.5 seconds and, following a delay of 70 ms, will proceed as if the +FTH=3 command were issued. At any stageup to (but excluding) the +FTH=3 command state, any character will abort the communication. (See the description of the+FTH command for details.)Bn - CCITT or BellWhen the modem is configured to allow either option, the modem will select Bell or CCITT modulation for a line speedconnection of 300 or 1200 bps according to the parameter supplied. Any other line speed will use a CCITT modulationstandard. The parameter value, if valid, is written to S27 bit 6. (Also, see ATFn command.)B0 Selects CCITT operation at 300 or 1200 bps during Call Establishment and a subsequentconnection. (Default for W-class models.)B1 Selects BELL operation at 300 or 1200 bps during Call Establishment and a subsequentconnection. (Default for US models.)Result Codes:OK n = 0 or 1.ERROR Otherwise.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 3-3Cn - Carrier ControlThis command is included for compatibility only, and has no effect other than returning a result code. The only validparameter is 1.Result Codes:OK n = 1.ERROR Otherwise.Dn - DialThis command directs the modem to go on-line, dial according to the string entered and attempt to establish a connection. Ifno dial string is supplied, the modem will go on-line and attempt the handshake in originate mode. In W-class models, theaction of going off-hook is affected by the status of the Line Current Sense input, if line current sensing is enabled, and bythe blacklist and delayed list. NOTE: If the ATD command is issued before the S1 register has cleared, the modem willrespond with the NO CARRIER result code.If +FCLASS=0 is selected, the modem will behave as a data modem and will attempt to connect to another data modem.The modem will have up to the period of time specified by register S6 or S7 to wait for carrier and complete the handshake.If this time expires before the modem can complete the handshake, the modem will go on-hook with the NO CARRIERresponse. This command will be aborted in progress upon receipt of any DTE character before completion of the handshake.If +FCLASS=1 or 2 is selected, the modem will behave as a facsimile modem and attempt to connect to a facsimile machine(or modem) by entering the HDLC V.21 channel 2 receive state (as if +FRH=3 had been issued). This command will beaborted upon receipt of any DTE character if the modem has not finished dialing. In this case, the modem will go on-hookand return to command mode after displaying the NO CARRIER message. If the modem has finished dialing, it proceeds asif the +FRH=3 command has been issued. (Refer to the +FRH command to determine how the modem behaves followingthis stage.)Dial Modifiers. The valid dial string parameters are described below. Punctuation characters may be used for clarity, withparentheses, hyphen, and spaces being ignored.0-9 DTMF digits 0 to 9.* The 'star' digit (tone dialing only).# The 'gate' digit (tone dialing only).A-D DTMF digits A, B, C, and D. Some countries may prohibit sending of these digits during dialing.L Re-dial last number: the modem will re-dial the last valid telephone number. The L must beimmediately after the D with all the following characters ignored).P Select pulse dialing: pulse dial the numbers that follow until a "T" is encountered. Affects current andsubsequent dialing. Some countries prevent changing dialing modes after the first digit is dialed.T Select tone dialing: tone dial the numbers that follow until a "P" is encountered. Affects current andsubsequent dialing. Some countries prevent changing dialing modes after the first digit is dialed.R This command will be accepted, but not acted on.S=n Dial the number stored in the directory (n = 0 to 3). (See &Z.)! Flash: the modem will go on-hook for a time defined by the value of S29. Country requirements maylimit the time imposed.W Wait for dial tone: the modem will wait for dial tone before dialing the digits following "W". If dial toneis not detected within the time specified by S7 (US) or S6 (W-class), the modem will abort the restof the sequence, return on-hook, and generate an error message.
AT Command Reference Manual3-4 1048@ Wait for silence: the modem will wait for at least 5 seconds of silence in the call progress frequencyband before continuing with the next dial string parameter. If the modem does not detect these 5seconds of silence before the expiration of the call abort timer (S7), the modem will terminate thecall attempt with a NO ANSWER message. If busy detection is enabled, the modem may terminatethe call with the BUSY result code. If answer tone arrives during execution of this parameter, themodem handshakes.& Wait for credit card dialing tone before continuing with the dial string. If the tone is not detectedwithin the time specified by S7 (US models) or S6 (W-class models), the modem will abort the restof the sequence, return on-hook, and generate an error message., Dial pause: the modem will pause for a time specified by S8 before dialing the digits following ",".; Return to command state. Added to the end of a dial string, this causes the modem to return to thecommand state after it processes the portion of the dial string preceding the ";". This allows the userto issue additional AT commands while remaining off-hook. The additional AT commands may beplaced in the original command line following the ";" and/or may be entered on subsequentcommand lines. The modem will enter call progress only after an additional dial command is issuedwithout the ";" terminator. Use "H" to abort the dial in progress, and go back on-hook.^ Toggles calling tone enable/disable: applicable to current dial attempt only.( ) Ignored: may be used to format the dial string.- Ignored: may be used to format the dial string.<space> Ignored: may be used to format the dial string.<i> Invalid character: will be ignored.> If enabled by country specific parameter, the modem will generate a grounding pulse on the EARTHrelay output.En - Command EchoThe modem enables or disables the echo of characters to the DTE according to the parameter supplied. The parametervalue, if valid, is written to S14 bit 1.E0 Disables command echo.E1 Enables command echo. (Default.)Result Codes:OK n = 0 or 1.ERROR Otherwise.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 3-5Fn - Select Line Modulation (RC144 Models Only)This command selects the line modulation according to the parameter supplied. The line modulation is fixed unlessAutomode is selected. This command interacts with the S37 and the N command. The parameter value, if valid, is written toS37 bits 0-4. To select line modulation, it is recommended that either the F command, or a combination of the S37 and the Ncommand, be used, but not both.F0 Selects auto-detect mode. Sets N1 and sets S31 bit 1. In this mode, the modem configures forautomode operation. All connect speeds supported by the modem are possible according to theremote modem's preference. The contents of S37 are ignored as is the sensed DTE speed.F1 Selects V.21 or Bell 103 according to the B setting as the only acceptable line speed resulting in asubsequent connection. Sets N0, sets S37 to 1, and clears S31 bit 1. This command is equivalentto the command string: ATN0S37=1.F2 Not supported.F3 Selects V.23 as the only acceptable line modulation for a subsequent connection. Originator is at75 bps and answerer is at 1200 bps. Sets N0, sets S37 to 7, and clears S31 bit 1. This commandis equivalent to the command string: ATN0S37=7.F4 Selects V.22 1200 or Bell 212A according to the B command setting as the only acceptable linespeed for a subsequent connection. Sets N0, sets S37 to 5, and clears S31 bit 1. This commandis equivalent to the command string: ATN0S37=5.F5 Selects V.22 bis as the only acceptable line modulation for a subsequent connection. Sets N0,sets S37 to 6, and clears S31 bit 1. This command is equivalent to the command string:ATN0S37=6.F6 Select V.32 bis 4800 or V.32 4800 as the only acceptable line modulation for a subsequentconnection. Sets N0, sets S37 to 8, and clears S31 bit 1. This command is equivalent to thecommand string: ATN0S37=8.F7 Selects V.32 bis 7200 as the only acceptable line modulation for a subsequent connection. SetsN0, sets S37 to 12, and clears S31 bit 1. This command is equivalent to the command string:ATN0S37=12.This setting also allows connection at the Rockwell proprietary 7200 V.32 speed, e.g., with aRC9696/12 based modem.F8 Selects V.32 bis 9600 or V.32 9600 as the only acceptable line modulations for a subsequentconnection. Sets N0, sets S37 to 9, and clears S31 bit 1. This command is equivalent to thecommand string: ATN0S37=9.F9 Selects V.32 bis 12000 as the only acceptable line modulation for a subsequent connection. SetsN0, sets S37 to 10, and clears S31 bit 1. This command is equivalent to the command string:ATN0S37=10.This setting also allows connection at the Rockwell proprietary 12000 V.32 speed, e.g., with aRC9696/12 based modem.F10 Selects V.32 bis 14400 as the only acceptable line modulation for a subsequent connection. SetsN0, sets S37 to 11, and clears S31 bit 1. This command is equivalent to the command string:ATN0S37=11.
AT Command Reference Manual3-6 1048Hn - Disconnect (Hang-Up)This command initiates a hang up sequence.This command may not be available for some countries due to PTT restrictions.H0 The modem will release the line if the modem is currently on-line, and will terminate any test(AT&T) that is in progress. Country specific, modulation specific, and error correction protocolspecific (S38) processing is handled outside of the H0 command.H1 If on-hook, the modem will go off-hook and enter command mode. For US models, the modemwill remain off-hook. For W-class models, the modem will return on-hook after a period of timedetermined by S7.Result Codes:OK n = 0 or 1.ERROR Otherwise.In - IdentificationThe modem reports to the DTE the requested result according to the command parameter.I0 Reports product code. Example: 28800I1 Calculates the ROM checksum and reports the least significant byte of the checksum in decimal(see firmware release notes). Reports 255 if the prestored checksum value is FFh.I2 Calculates the ROM checksum and compares it with the prestored checksum. Reports "OK" if thecalculated checksum equals the prestored checksum or if the prestored checksum value is FFh;otherwise reports “ERROR”.I3 Reports the firmware version (F), basic model (e.g.,V34), application code (A), and interface typecode (I) typically in the form VF.FFF-V34_AI. The application codes are: D = Desktop, L = LowPower (PCMCIA). The interface type codes are: S = Serial, P = Parallel. Example: V1.400-V34_DSNote: If RPI+ is supported, “ROCKWELL RPI (TM)” is appended.I4 Reports OEM defined identifier string in either Hayes-compatible binary format (default) or ASCIIformat (selectable by ConfigurACE). Example: RC288ACi (ASCII)I5 Reports Country Code parameter. Example: 022I6 Reports modem data pump model and internal code revision. Example: RC288DPi Rev 05BAI7 Reports the DAA code resulting from MCU interrogation of the DAA for auto DAA recognition.Examples: 000 for US or Canada, 016 for Japan, 033 for Belgium, 034 for Finland, 035 forFrance, 037 for Italy, 038 for Netherlands, 039 for Sweden, 040 for Switzerland, and 041 for UK.Result Codes:OK n = 0 to 7.ERROR Otherwise.Ln - Speaker VolumeThe modem sets the speaker volume control according to the parameter supplied. The parameter value, if valid, is written toS22 bits 0 and 1.L0 Low volume.L1 Low volume. (Default.)L2 Medium volume.L3 High volume.Result Codes:OK n = 0 to 3.ERROR Otherwise.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 3-7Mn - Speaker ControlThis command selects when the speaker will be on or off. The parameter value, if valid, is written to S22 bits 2 and 3.M0 Speaker is always off.M1 Speaker is on during call establishment, but off when receiving carrier. (Default.)M2 Speaker is always on.M3 Speaker is off when receiving carrier and during dialing, but on during answering.Result Codes:OK n = 0 to 3.ERROR Otherwise.Nn - Automode EnableThis command enables or disables automode detection. The parameter value, if valid, is written to S31 bit 1.N0 Automode detection is disabled (equivalent to setting the +MS <automode> subparameter to 0). Asubsequent handshake will be conducted according to the contents of S37 or, if S37 is zero,according to the most recently sensed DTE speed.N1 Automode detection is enabled (equivalent to setting the +MS <automode> subparameter to 1). Asubsequent handshake will be conducted according the automode algorithm supported by themodem, e.g., according to the contents of S37 or, if S37 is zero, starting at 28800 bps V.34(RC288). This command is also equivalent to F0 (RC144). (Default.)Result Codes:OK n = 0 or 1.ERROR Otherwise.Notes:1. The Nn and S37=x commands override the +MS command settings. When the N0 or N1 command is issued, the +MSsubparameters are updated to reflect the Nn and S37 values (see +MS command and S37 register). For example:N1S37=10 updates the +MS command subparameters to reflect +MS=10,1,300,12000N0S37=10 updates the +MS command subparameters to reflect +MS=10,0,12000,120002. Use of the +MS command is recommended instead of the Nn and S37=x commands. Nn and S37=x commands aresupported for compatibility with existing communication software.On - Return to On-Line Data ModeThis command determines how the modem will enter the on-line data mode. If the modem is in the on-line command mode,the enters the on-line data mode with or without a retrain. If the modem is in the off-line command mode (no connection),ERROR is reported.O0 Enters on-line data mode without a retrain. Handling is determined by the Call Establishment task.Generally, if a connection exists, this command connects the DTE back to the remote modemafter an escape (+++).O1 Enters on-line data mode with a retrain before returning to on-line data mode.Result Codes:OK n = 0 or 1 and a connection exists.ERROR Otherwise or if not connected.
AT Command Reference Manual3-8 1048P - Set Pulse Dial DefaultThis command forces pulse dialing until the next T dial modifier or T command is received. Sets S14 bit 5.As soon as a dial command is executed which explicitly specifies the dialing mode for that particular call (e.g., ATDT...), thiscommand is overridden so that all future dialing will be tone dialed. (See T command.)This command may not be permitted in some countries.Result Code:OKQn - Quiet Results Codes ControlThe command enables or disables the sending of result codes to the DTE according to the parameter supplied. Theparameter value, if valid, is written to S14 bit 2.Q0 Enables result codes to the DTE. (Default.)Q1 Disables result codes to the DTE.Result Codes:OK n = 0 or 1.ERROR Otherwise.Sn - Read/Write S-RegisterThe modem selects an S-Register, performs an S-Register read or write function, or reports the value of an S-Register.n Establishes S-Register n as the last register accessed.n=v Sets S-Register n to the value v.n? Reports the value of S-Register n.The parameter n can be omitted, in which case the last S-Register accessed will be assumed. The S can be omitted for AT=and AT?, in which case the last S-Register accessed will be assumed.For example:ATS7 establishes S7 as the last accessed register.AT=40 sets the contents of the last register accessed to 40.ATS=20 sets the contents of the last register accessed to 20.If the number "n" is beyond the range of the S-Registers available, the modem will return the ERROR message. The value"v" is "MOD"ed with 256. If the result is outside the range permitted for a given S-Register the values will still be stored, butfunctionally the lower and higher limits will be observed. Input and output are always in decimal format. Note that some S-Registers are read-only.In some cases, writing to the S-Register will appear to be accepted but the value will not actually be written.Due to country restrictions, some commands will be accepted, but the value may be limited and replaced by a maximum orminimum value.Minimum, maximum, and default values for S-Registers may be altered with ConfigurACE.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 3-9T - Set Tone Dial DefaultThis command forces DTMF dialing until the next P dial modifier or P command is received. The modem will set an S-Register bit to indicate that all subsequent dialing should be conducted in tone mode. Note that the DP command willoverride this command. Clears S14 bit 5.This command may not be permitted in some countries. (See P.)Result Code:OKVn - Result Code FormThis command selects the sending of short-form or long-form result codes to the DTE. The parameter, if valid, is written toS14 bit 3.V0 Enables short-form (terse) result codes. Line feed is not issued before a short-form result code.V1 Enables long-form (verbose) result codes. (Default.)Result Codes:OK n = 0 or 1.ERROR Otherwise.Wn - Connect Message ControlThis command controls the format of CONNECT messages. The parameter value, if valid, is written to S31 bits 2 and 3.Note that the Wn command can be overridden by register S95 bits (see S95 description).W0 Upon connection, the modem reports only the DTE speed (e.g., CONNECT 19200). Subsequentresponses are disabled. (Default.)W1 Upon connection, the modem reports the line speed, the error correction protocol, and the DTEspeed, respectively. Subsequent responses are disabled.W2 Upon connection, the modem reports the DCE speed (e.g., CONNECT 14400). Subsequentresponses are disabled.Result Codes:OK n = 0, 1, or 2.ERROR Otherwise.
AT Command Reference Manual3-10 1048Xn - Extended Result CodesThis command selects which subset of the result messages will be used by the modem to inform the DTE of the results ofcommands.Blind dialing is enabled or disabled by country parameters. If the user wishes to enforce dial tone detection, a "W" can beplaced in the dial string (see D command). Note that the information below is based upon the default implementation of the Xresults table. Table 3-1 indicates the messages which are enabled for each X value.If the modem is in facsimile mode (+FCLASS=1 or 2), the only message sent to indicate a connection is CONNECT withouta speed indication.X0 Disables monitoring of busy tones unless forced otherwise by country requirements; send onlyOK, CONNECT, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR, and NO ANSWER result codes. Blind dialing isenabled/disabled by country parameters. If busy tone detection is enforced and busy tone isdetected, NO CARRIER will be reported. If dial tone detection is enforced or selected and dialtone is not detected, NO CARRIER will be reported instead of NO DIAL TONE. The value 000b iswritten to S22 bits 6, 5, and 4, respectively.X1 Disables monitoring of busy tones unless forced otherwise by country requirements; send onlyOK, CONNECT, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR, NO ANSWER, and CONNECT XXXX (XXXX =rate). Blind dialing enabled/disabled by country parameters. If busy tone detection is enforced andbusy tone is detected, NO CARRIER will be reported instead of BUSY. If dial tone detection isenforced or selected and dial tone is not detected, NO CARRIER will be reported instead of NODIAL TONE. The value 100b is written to S22 bits 6, 5, and 4, respectively.X2 Disables monitoring of busy tones unless forced otherwise by country requirements; send onlyOK, CONNECT, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR, NO DIALTONE, NO ANSWER, and CONNECTXXXX. If busy tone detection is enforced and busy tone is detected, NO CARRIER will bereported instead of BUSY. If dial tone detection is enforced or selected and dial tone is notdetected, NO DIAL TONE will be reported instead of NO CARRIER. The value 101b is written toS22 bits 6, 5, and 4, respectively.X3 Enables monitoring of busy tones; send only OK, CONNECT, RING, NO CARRIER, ERROR, NOANSWER, and CONNECT XXXX. Blind dialing is enabled/disabled by country parameters. If dialtone detection is enforced and dial tone is not detected, NO CARRIER will be reported. The value110b is written to S22 bits 6, 5, and 4, respectively.X4 Enables monitoring of busy tones; send all messages. The value 111b is written to S22 bits 6, 5,and 4, respectively. (Default.)Result Codes:OK n = 0 to 4.ERROR Otherwise.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 3-11 Table 3-1. Result CodesShort Form Long Form n Value in ATXn Command Notes012340 OK xxxxx1 CONNECT xxxxx2 RING xxxxx3 NO CARRIER xxxxx4 ERROR xxxxx5 CONNECT 1200 1 xxxx6 NO DIALTONE 3 3 x x x7 BUSY 3 3 3 x x8 NO ANSWER xxxxx9 CONNECT 0600 1 xxxx10 CONNECT 2400 1 xxxx11 CONNECT 4800 1 xxxx12 CONNECT 9600 1 xxxx13 CONNECT 7200 1 xxxx14 CONNECT 12000 1 xxxx15 CONNECT 14400 1 xxxx16 CONNECT 19200 1 xxxx17 CONNECT 38400 1 xxxx18 CONNECT 57600 1 xxxx19 CONNECT 115200 1 xxxx20 CONNECT 230400 xxxxxNote 422 CONNECT 75TX/1200RX 1 xxxx23 CONNECT 1200TX/75RX 1 xxxx24 DELAYED 4444x32 BLACKLISTED 4444x33FAX xxxxx35 DATA xxxxx40 CARRIER 300 xxxxx44 CARRIER 1200/75 xxxxx45 CARRIER 75/1200 xxxxx46 CARRIER 1200 xxxxx47 CARRIER 2400 xxxxx48 CARRIER 4800 xxxxx49 CARRIER 7200 xxxxx50 CARRIER 9600 xxxxx51 CARRIER 12000 xxxxx52 CARRIER 14400 xxxxx53 CARRIER 16800 xxxxxNote 254 CARRIER 19200 xxxxxNote 255 CARRIER 21600 xxxxxNote 256 CARRIER 24000 xxxxxNote 257 CARRIER 26400 xxxxxNote 258 CARRIER 28800 xxxxxNote 259 CONNECT 16800 1 xxxxNote 261 CONNECT 21600 1 xxxxNote 262 CONNECT 24000 1 xxxxNote 2
AT Command Reference Manual3-12 1048 Table 3-1. Result Codes (Cont'd)Short Form Long Form n Value in ATXn Command Notes0123463 CONNECT 26400 1 x x x x Note 264 CONNECT 28800 1 x x x x Note 266 COMPRESSION: CLASS 5 xxxxx67 COMPRESSION: V.42 bis xxxxx69 COMPRESSION: NONE xxxxx70 PROTOCOL: NONE xxxxx77 PROTOCOL: LAPM xxxxx78 CARRIER 31200 xxxxxNote 379 CARRIER 33600 xxxxxNote 380 PROTOCOL: ALT xxxxx81 PROTOCOL: ALT-CELLULAR xxxxx84 CONNECT 33600 1 x x x x Note 391 CONNECT 31200 1 x x x x Note 3150 CARRIER 32000 xxxxxNote 4151 CARRIER 34000 xxxxxNote 4152 CARRIER 36000 xxxxxNote 4153 CARRIER 38000 xxxxxNote 4154 CARRIER 40000 xxxxxNote 4155 CARRIER 42000 xxxxxNote 4156 CARRIER 44000 xxxxxNote 4157 CARRIER 46000 xxxxxNote 4158 CARRIER 48000 xxxxxNote 4159 CARRIER 50000 xxxxxNote 4160 CARRIER 52000 xxxxxNote 4161 CARRIER 54000 xxxxxNote 4162 CARRIER 56000 xxxxxNote 4165 CONNECT 32000 xxxxxNote 4166 CONNECT 34000 xxxxxNote 4167 CONNECT 36000 xxxxxNote 4168 CONNECT 38000 xxxxxNote 4169 CONNECT 40000 xxxxxNote 4170 CONNECT 42000 xxxxxNote 4171 CONNECT 44000 xxxxxNote 4172 CONNECT 46000 xxxxxNote 4173 CONNECT 48000 xxxxxNote 4174 CONNECT 50000 xxxxxNote 4175 CONNECT 52000 xxxxxNote 4176 CONNECT 54000 xxxxxNote 4177 CONNECT 56000 xxxxxNote 4+F4 +FCERROR xxxxxNotes:1.  An 'x' in a column indicates that the message (either the long form if verbose, or the value only for short form) will begenerated when that particular value of 'n' (shown at the top of the column) has been selected by the use of ATXn. If thecolumn is blank, then no message will be generated for that x option. A numeral indicates which less explicit message(verbose or short form) will be output for that X option. (Also, see Section 3.3).2.  RC288 and higher rate modems.3.  RC336 and higher rate modems.4. RC56 modems.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 3-13Yn - Long Space DisconnectThis command enables/disables the generation and response to long space disconnect. The parameter value, if valid, iswritten to S21 bit 7.Y0 Disables long space disconnect. (default.)Y1 Enables long space disconnect. In non-error correction mode, the modem will send a long spaceof four seconds prior to going on-hook. In non-error correction mode, the modem will respond tothe receipt of a long space (i.e., a break signal greater than 1.6 seconds) by going on-hook.Result Codes:OK n = 0 or 1.ERROR Otherwise.Zn - Soft Reset and Restore ProfileThe modem performs a soft reset and restores (recalls) the configuration profile according to the parameter supplied. If noparameter is specified, zero is assumed.Z0 Soft reset and restore stored profile 0.Z1 Soft reset and restore stored profile 1.Result Codes:OK n = 0 or 1.ERROR Otherwise.
AT Command Reference Manual3-14 10483.2.2 AT& Commands&Cn - RLSD (DCD) OptionThe modem controls the RLSD output in accordance with the parameter supplied. The parameter value, if valid, is written toS21 bit 5.&C0 RLSD remains ON at all times.&C1 RLSD follows the state of the carrier. (Default.)Result Codes:OK n = 0 or 1.ERROR Otherwise.&Dn - DTR OptionThis command interprets the ON to OFF transition of the DTR signal from the DTE in accordance with the parametersupplied. The parameter value, if valid, is written to S21 bits 3 and 4. Also, see S25.&D0 - DTR drop is interpreted according to the current &Qn setting as follows:&Q0, &Q5, &Q6 DTR is ignored (assumed ON). Allows operation with DTEs which donot provide DTR.&Q1, &Q4 DTR drop causes the modem to hang up. Auto-answer is not affected.&Q2, &Q3 DTR drop causes the modem to hang up. Auto-answer is inhibited.&D1 DTR drop is interpreted according to the current &Qn setting as follows:&Q0, &Q1, &Q4, &Q5, &Q6 DTR drop is interpreted by the modem as if the asynchronousescape sequence had been entered. The modem returns toasynchronous command state without disconnecting.&Q2, &Q3 DTR drop causes the modem to hang up. Auto-answer is inhibited.&D2 DTR drop is interpreted according to the current &Qn setting as follows:&Q0 through &Q6 DTR drop causes the modem to hang up. Auto-answer is inhibited.(Default.)&D3 DTR drop is interpreted according to the current &Qn setting as follows:&Q0, &Q1, &Q4, &Q5, &Q6 DTR drop causes the modem to perform a soft reset as if theZ command were received. The &Y setting determines which profile isloaded.&Q2, &Q3 DTR drop causes the modem to hang up. Auto-answer is inhibited.If &Q5, &Q6, +FCLASS=1 or +FCLASS=2 is in effect, the action taken is the same as for &Q0.&Fn - Restore Factory Configuration (Profile)The modem loads the factory default configuration (profile). The factory defaults are identified for each command and in theS-Register descriptions. A configuration (profile) consists of a subset of S-Registers.&F0 Restore factory configuration 0.&F1 Restore factory configuration 1.Result Codes:OKERROR If the modem is connected.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 3-15&Gn - Select Guard ToneThe modem generates the guard tone selected by this command according to the parameter supplied (DPSK modulationmodes only). The parameter value, if valid, is written to S23 bits 6 and 7.&G0 Disables guard tone. (Default for US models.)&G1 Disables guard tone.&G2 Selects 1800 Hz guard tone. (Default for W-class models.)This command may not be permitted in some countries.Result Codes:OK n = 0 to 2.ERROR Otherwise.&Jn - Telephone Jack ControlThis command is included only for compatibility and performs no function except to load the S-Register. The parametervalue, if valid, is written S21 bit 1.&J0 &J0 command. (Default.)&J1 &J1 command.Result Codes:OK n = 0 or 1.ERROR Otherwise.&Kn - Flow ControlThis command defines the DTE/DCE (terminal/modem) flow control mechanism. The parameter value, if valid, is written toS39 bits 0, 1, and 2.&K0 Disables flow control.&K3 Enables RTS/CTS flow control. (Default for data modem modes.)&K4 Enables XON/XOFF flow control.&K5 Enables transparent XON/XOFF flow control.&K6 Enables both RTS/CTS and XON/XOFF flow control. (Default for fax modem and voice modes.)Result Codes:OK n = 0, 3, 4, 5, or 6.ERROR Otherwise.&Ln - Leased Line OperationThis command requests leased line or dial-up operation. This command is provided for compatibility only; no mode change isperformed, dial-up operation continues. The OK response is returned for a valid parameter, but no other action is performed.The parameter value, if valid, is written to S27 bit 2.&L0 Requests dial-up operation. Dial-up operation continues.Result Codes:OK n = 0.ERROR Otherwise.
AT Command Reference Manual3-16 1048&Mn - Asynchronous/Synchronous Mode SelectionThis command determines the DTR operating mode. The modem treats the &M command as a subset of the &Q command.&M0 Selects direct asynchronous operation. Note that the command sequence &M0\N0 selects normalbuffered mode, but the command sequence \N0&M0 selects direct mode. This is because the \N0command is analogous to the &Q6 command. The value 000b is written to S27 bits 3, 1, and 0,respectively. (See &Q).&M1 Selects synchronous connect mode with async off-line command mode. The value 001b is writtento S27 bits 3, 1, and 0, respectively. (Serial interface operation only.)&M2 Selects synchronous connect mode with async off-line command mode. Same as &M1 exceptthat &M2 enables DTR dialing of directory slot 0. The modem will disconnect if DTR is OFF formore than the period in S25 (in units of hundredths of a second): the data connection will besynchronous. The value 010b is written to S27 bits 3, 1, and 0, respectively. (Serial interfaceoperation only.)&M3 Selects synchronous connect mode. This mode allows DTR to act as a talk/data switch. The callis manually initiated while DTR is inactive. When DTR becomes active, the handshake proceedsin originate or answer mode according to S14 bit 7. The value 011b is written to S27 bits 3, 1, and0, respectively. (Serial interface operation only.)Result Codes:OK n = 0 to 3.ERROR Otherwise.&Pn - Select Pulse Dial Make/Break RatioThis command determines the make/break ratio used during pulse dialing. It is only effective if the appropriate bit to enablethis command is set through the ConfigurACE program. If enabled, it will override the make/break ratios in the OEMparameters in ConfigurACE. The default is country-dependent. The parameter value, if valid, is written to S28 bits 3 and 4.&P0 Selects 39%-61% make/break ratio at 10 pulses per second. (Default.)&P1 Selects 33%-67% make/break ratio at 10 pulses per second.&P2 Selects 39%-61% make/break ratio at 20 pulses per second.&P3 Selects 33%-67% make/break ratio at 20 pulses per second.Result Codes:OK n = 0 to 3.ERROR Otherwise.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 3-17&Qn - Sync/Async ModeThis command is an extension of the &M command and is used to control the connection modes permitted. It is used inconjunction with S36 and S48. (Also, see \N.)NOTE: When the &Q0 to &Q4 command is issued to select the mode, the subsequent connect message will report the DCEspeed regardless of the W command and S95 settings.&Q0 Selects direct asynchronous operation. The value 000b is written to S27 bits 3, 1, and 0,respectively. See &M0.&Q1 Selects synchronous connect mode with async off-line command mode. The value 001b is writtento S27 bits 3, 1, and 0, respectively. See &M1. (Serial interface operation only.)&Q2 Selects synchronous connect mode with async off-line command mode and enables DTR dialingof directory 0. The value 010b is written to S27 bits 3, 1, and 0, respectively. See &M2. (Serialinterface operation only.)&Q3 Selects synchronous connect mode with async off-line command mode and enables DTR to actas Talk/Data switch. The value 011b is written to S27 bits 3, 1, and 0, respectively. See &M3.(Serial interface operation only.)&Q4 Selects AutoSync operation. The value 100b is written to S27 bits 3, 1, and 0, respectively.AutoSync operation, when used in conjunction with the Hayes Synchronous Interface (HSI)capability in the DTE, provides synchronous communication capability from an asynchronousterminal.Starting AutoSync. Set registers S19, S20, and S25 to the desired values before selectingAutoSync operation with &Q4. After the CONNECT message is issued, the modem waits theperiod of time specified by S25 before examining DTR. If DTR is on, the modem enters thesynchronous operating state; if DTR is off, the modem terminates the line connection and returnsto the asynchronous command state.Stopping AutoSync. AutoSync operation is stopped upon loss of carrier or the on-to-offtransition of DTR. Loss of carrier will cause the modem to return to the asynchronous commandstate. An on-to-off transition of DTR will cause the modem to return to the asynchronouscommand state and either not terminate the line connection (&D1 active) or terminate the lineconnection (any other &Dn command active).&Q5 The modem will try to negotiate an error-corrected link. The modem can be configured using S36to determine whether a failure will result in the modem returning on-hook or will result in fallbackto an asynchronous connection. The value 101b is written to S27 bits 3, 1, and 0, respectively.(Default.)&Q6 Selects asynchronous operation in normal mode (speed buffering). The value 110b is written toS27 bits 3, 1, and 0, respectively.Result Codes:OK n = 0 to 6.ERROR Otherwise.
AT Command Reference Manual3-18 1048&Rn - RTS/CTS OptionThis selects how the modem controls CTS. CTS operation is modified if hardware flow control is selected (see &Kcommand). The parameter value, if valid, is written to S21 bit 2.&R0 In sync mode, CTS tracks the state of RTS; the RTS-to-CTS delay is defined by S26. In asyncmode, CTS is normally ON and will turn OFF only if required by flow control.&R1 In sync mode, CTS is always ON (RTS transitions are ignored). tracks the state of RTS; In asyncmode, CTS is normally ON and will turn OFF only if required by flow control.Result Codes:OK n = 0 or 1.ERROR Otherwise.&Sn - DSR OverrideThis command selects how the modem will control DSR. The parameter value, if valid, is written to S21 bit 6.&S0 DSR will remain ON at all times. (Default.)&S1 DSR will become active after answer tone has been detected and inactive after the carrier hasbeen lost.Result Codes:OK n = 0 or 1.ERROR Otherwise.&Tn - Test and DiagnosticsThe modem will perform selected test and diagnostic functions according to the parameter supplied. A test can be run onlywhen in an asynchronous operation in non-error-correction mode (normal or direct mode). To terminate a test in progress,the escape sequence must be entered first, except for parameters 7 and 8 (see Section 3.1.3). If S18 is non-zero, a test willterminate automatically after the time specified by S18 and display the OK message. Note: For tests 3, 6, and 7, aconnection between the two modems must first be established.&T0 Terminates test in progress. Clears S16.&T1 Initiates local analog loopback, V.54 Loop 3. Sets S16 bit 0. If a connection exists when thiscommand is issued, the modem hangs up. The CONNECT XXXX message is displayed upon thestart of the test.&T2 Returns ERROR.&T3 Initiates local digital loopback, V.54 Loop 2. Sets S16 bit 2. If no connection exists, ERROR isreturned. Sets S16 bit 4 when the test is in progress.&T4 Enables digital loopback acknowledgment for remote request, i.e., an RDL request from a remotemodem is allowed. Sets S23 bit 0.&T5 Disables digital loopback acknowledgment for remote request, i.e., an RDL request from a remotemodem is denied. Clears S23 bit 0. (Default.)&T6 Requests a remote digital loopback (RDL), V.54 Loop 2, without self test. If no connection exists,ERROR is returned. Sets S16 bit 4 when the test is in progress. The CONNECT XXXX messageis displayed upon the start of the test.&T7 Requests a remote digital loopback (RDL),V.54 Loop 2, with self test. (In self test, a test pattern islooped back and checked by the modem.) If no connection exists, ERROR is returned. When thetest is terminated either via expiration of S18, or via the &T0 or H command, the number ofdetected errors is reported to the DTE. Sets S16 bit 5 when the test is in progress.&T8 Initiates local analog loopback, V.54 Loop 3, with self test. (In self test, a test pattern is loopedback and checked by the modem.) If a connection exists, the modem hangs up before the test isinitiated. When the test is terminated either via expiration of S18, or via the &T0 or H command,the number of detected errors is reported to the DTE. Sets S16 bit 6 when the test is in progress.This command may not be available in some countries due to PTT restrictions.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 3-19&V - Display Current Configuration and Stored ProfilesReports the current (active) configuration, the stored (user) profiles, and the first four stored telephone numbers. The storedprofiles and telephone numbers are not displayed if the NVRAM is not installed or is not operational as detected by theNVRAM test during reset processing.Result Code:OKExample:AT&VACTIVE PROFILE:B0 E1 L1 M1 N1 QO T V1 W0 X4 Y0 &C0 &D0 &G2 &J0 &K3 &Q5 &R1 &S0 &T4 &X0 &Y0S00:002 S01:000 S02:043 S03:013 S04:010 S05:008 S06:002 S07:030 S08:002 S09:006S10:014 S11:255 S12:050 S18:000 S25:005 S26:001 S36:007 S37:000 S38:020 S46:138S48:007 S95:000STORED PROFILE 0:B0 E1 L1 M1 N1 QO T V1 W0 X4 Y0 &C0 &D0 &G2 &J0 &K3 &Q5 &R1 &S0 &T4 &X0S00:002 S02:043 S06:002 S07:030 S08:002 S09:006 S10:014 S11:095 S12:050 S18:000S36:007 S37:000 S40:105 S41:003 S46:138 S95:000STORED PROFILE 1:B0 E1 L1 M1 N1 QO T V1 W0 X4 Y0 &C0 &D0 &G2 &J0 &K3 &Q5 &R1 &S0 &T4 &X0S00:002 S02:043 S06:002 S07:030 S08:002 S09:006 S10:014 S11:095 S12:050 S18:000S36:007 S37:000 S40:105 S41:003 S46:138 S95:000TELEPHONE NUMBERS:0 = 1 =2 = 3 =OK3.2.3  &V1 - Display Last Connection StatisticsDisplays the last connection statistics in the following format (shown with typical results):TERMINATION REASON.......... LINK DISCONNECT or LOCAL REQUESTLAST TX data rate........... 33600 BPSHIGHEST TX data rate........ 33600 BPSLAST RX data rate........... 28800 BPSHIGHEST RX data rate........ 28800 BPSError correction PROTOCOL... LAPMData COMPRESSION............ V42BisLine QUALITY................ 030Highest SPX RX state........ 068Highest SPX TX state........ 067
AT Command Reference Manual3-20 1048&Wn - Store Current ConfigurationSaves the current (active) configuration (profile), including S-Registers, in one of the two user profiles in NVRAM as denotedby the parameter value. This command will yield an ERROR message if the NVRAM is not installed or is not operational asdetected by the NVRAM test.The current configuration is comprised of a list of storable parameters illustrated in the &V command. These settings arerestored to the active configuration upon receiving an Zn command or at power up (see &Yn command).&W0 Store the current configuration as profile 0.&W1 Store the current configuration as profile 1.Result Codes:OK n = 0 or 1.ERROR Otherwise.&Xn - Select Synchronous Clock SourceSelects the source of the transmit clock for the synchronous mode of operation. The parameter value, if valid, is written toS27 bits 4 and 5.In asynchronous mode, the transmit and receive clocks are turned OFF. In synchronous mode, the clocks are turned ONwith the frequency of 1200 Hz or faster corresponding to the speed that is selected for modem operation.&X0 Selects internal timing. The modem generates the transmit clock signal and applies it to theTXCLK output at the serial interface.&X1 Selects external timing. The local DTE sources the transmit clock signal on the XTCLK input ofthe serial interface. The modem applies this clock to the TXCLK output at the serial interface.&X2 Selects slave receive timing. The modem derives the transmit clock signal from the incomingcarrier and applies it to the TXCLK output at the serial interface.Result Codes:OK n = 0 to 2.ERROR Otherwise.&Yn - Designate a Default Reset ProfileSelects which user profile will be used after a hard reset.&Y0 The modem will use profile 0.&Y1 The modem will use profile 1.Result Codes:OK n = 0 to 1.ERROR If n > 1, or if NVRAM is not installed or is not operational.&Zn=x - Store Telephone NumberThe modem can store up to four telephone numbers and each telephone number dial string can contain up to 34 digits.&Zn=x n = 0 to 3 and x = dial string. (Requires 256-byte NVRAM.)Result Codes:OK For n ≤ 3, and x ≤ 34 digits.ERROR If n > 3, x > 35 digits, or if NVRAM is not installed or is not operational.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 3-213.2.4 AT% Commands%En - Enable/Disable Line Quality Monitor and Auto-Retrain or Fallback/Fall ForwardControls whether or not the modem will automatically monitor the line quality and request a retrain (%E1) or fall back whenline quality is insufficient or fall forward when line quality is sufficient (%E2). The parameter value, if valid, is written to S41bits 2 and 6.If enabled, the modem attempts to retrain for a maximum of 30 seconds.%E0 Disable line quality monitor and auto-retrain.%E1 Enable line quality monitor and auto-retrain.%E2 Enable line quality monitor and fallback/fall forward. (Default.)Result Codes:OK n = 0, 1, or 2.ERROR Otherwise.Fallback/Fall Forward. When %E2 is active, the modem monitors the line quality (EQM). When line quality is insufficient,the modem will initiate a rate renegotiation to a lower speed within the V.34/V.32 bis/V.32 (RC288) or V.32 bis/V.32  (RC144)modulation speeds. The modem will keep falling back within the current modulation if necessary until the speed reaches2400 bps (V.34) or 4800 bps (V.32). Below this rate, the modem will only do retrains if EQM thresholds are exceeded. If theEQM is sufficient for at least one minute, the modem will initiate a rate renegotiation to a higher speed within the currentmodulation speeds. The rate renegotiations will be done without a retrain if a V.32 bis connection is established.Speeds attempted during fallback/fall forward are those shown to be available in the rate sequences exchanged during theinitial connection. Fallback/fall forward is available in error correction and normal modes, but not in direct mode orsynchronous mode with external clocks.%L - Line Signal LevelReturns a value which indicates the received signal level. The value returned is a direct indication (DAA dependent) of thereceive level at the MDP, not at the telephone line connector. For example, 009 = -9 dBm, 043 = -43 dBm, and so on.Result Codes:OK%Q - Line Signal QualityReports the line signal quality (DAA dependent). Returns the higher order byte of the EQM value. Based on the EQM value,retrain or fallback/fall forward may be initiated if enabled by %E1 or %E2.Example:AT%Q015Result Codes:OK If connected.ERROR If not connected, or connected in 300 bps, V.23, or fax modes.
AT Command Reference Manual3-22 1048%7 - Plug and Play Serial Number%7<8 hex numbers><same 8 hex numbers><cr> - Sets Plug and Play Serial NumberSets and stores eight serial numbers in hex format used for serial Plug and Play and for ISA Plug and Play which use theRockwell 11575 Plug and Play device.Example:AT%7<8 hex numbers><same 8 hex numbers>Result Codes:OK <8 hex numbers><same 8 hex numbers>ERROR OtherwiseTo display the stored serial number, issue AT"?<cr>.%8 - Plug and Play Vendor ID and Product NumberSets and stores Vendor ID and product number for serial Plug and Play and for ISA Plug and Play which use the Rockwell11575 Plug and Play device.Example:AT%8<3 ASCII characters><4 hex numbers><same 3 ASCII characters><same 4 hex numbers><cr>Result Codes:OK <3 ASCII characters><4 hex numbers><same 3 ASCII characters><same 4 hex numbers>ERROR Otherwise
AT Command Reference Manual1048 3-233.2.5 AT\ Commands\Kn - Break ControlControls the response of the modem to a break received from the DTE or the remote modem or the \B command accordingto the parameter supplied. The parameter value, if valid, is written to S40 bits 3, 4, and 5.The response is different in three separate states.The first state is where the modem receives a break from the DTE when the modem is operating in data transfer mode:\K0 Enter on-line command mode, no break sent to the remote modem.\K1 Clear data buffers and send break to remote modem.\K2 Same as 0.\K3 Send break to remote modem immediately.\K4 Same as 0.\K5 Send break to remote modem in sequence with transmitted data. (Default.)The second case is where the modem is in the on-line command state (waiting for AT commands) during a data connection,and the \B is received in order to send a break to the remote modem:\K0 Clear data buffers and send break to remote modem.\K1 Clear data buffers and send break to remote modem. (Same as 0.)\K2 Send break to remote modem immediately.\K3 Send break to remote modem immediately. (Same as 2.)\K4 Send break to remote modem in sequence with data.\K5 Send break to remote modem in sequence with data. (Same as 4.) (Default.)The third case is where a break is received from a remote modem during a non-error corrected connection:\K0 Clears data buffers and sends break to the DTE.\K1 Clears data buffers and sends break to the DTE. (Same as 0.)\K2 Send a break immediately to DTE.\K3 Send a break immediately to DTE. (Same as 2.)\K4 Send a break in sequence with received data to DTE.\K5 Send a break in sequence with received data to DTE. (Same as 4.) (Default.)Result Codes:OK n = 0 to 5.ERROR Otherwise.
AT Command Reference Manual3-24 1048\Nn - Operating ModeThis command controls the preferred error correcting mode to be negotiated in a subsequent data connection. Thiscommand is affected by the OEM firmware configuration.\N0 Selects normal speed buffered mode (disables error-correction mode). (Forces &Q6.)\N1 Serial interface selected - Selects direct mode and is equivalent to &M0, &Q0 mode of operation.(Forces &Q0.)Parallel interface selected - Same as \N0.\N2 Selects reliable (error-correction) mode. The modem will first attempt a LAPM connection andthen an MNP connection. Failure to make a reliable connection results in the modem hanging up.(Forces &Q5, S36=4, and S48=7.)\N3 Selects auto reliable mode. This operates the same as \N2 except failure to make a reliableconnection results in the modem falling back to the speed buffered normal mode. (Forces &Q5,S36=7, and S48=7.)\N4 Selects LAPM error-correction mode. Failure to make an LAPM error-correction connectionresults in the modem hanging up. (Forces &Q5 and S48=0.) Note: The -K1 command canoverride the \N4 command.\N5 Selects MNP error-correction mode. Failure to make an MNP error-correction connection resultsin the modem hanging up. (Forces &Q5, S36=4, and S48=128.)Result Codes:OK n = 0 to 5.ERROR Otherwise.\Vn - Single Line Connect Message EnableThe single line connect message format can be enabled or disabled by the \Vn command as follows:\V0 Connect messages are controlled by the command settings X, W, and S95.\V1 Connect messages are displayed in the single line format described below subject to thecommand settings V (Verbose) and Q (Quiet). In Non-Verbose mode (V0), single line connectmessages are disabled and a single numeric result code is generated for CONNECT DTE.When single line connect messages are enabled, there are no CARRIER, PROTOCOL, or COMPRESSION messages apartfrom the fields described below.The single line connect message format is:CONNECT <DTE Speed></Modulation></Protocol></Compression></Line Speed>/<Voice and Data>Where:<DTE Speed = DTE speed, e.g., 57600.Modulation = “V32” for V.32 or V.32bis modulations.“V34” for V.34 modulations.Note: Modulation is omitted for all other modulations.Protocol = “NONE” for no protocol.“ALT” for Microcom Network Protocol.“LAPM” for LAP-M protocol.Compression = “CLASS5” for Microcom MNP5 compression.“V42BIS” for V.42bis compression.Note: Compression is omitted if protocol is NONE.Line Speed = Asymmetric rates are displayed as /rate:TX/rate:RX, e.g., /1200 TX/75 RX.Symmetric rates are displayed as a single DCE rate, e.g., 14400.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 3-25Voice and Data = Blank for Data mode only.“SVD” for AudioSpan analog simultaneous audio/voice and data.“DSVD” for G.729A or DigiTalk digital simultaneous voice and data.3.2.6 AT+ Commands+MS - Select ModulationThis extended-format command selects the modulation and, optionally, enables or disables automode, specifies the lowestand highest connection rates, selects µ-Law or A-Law codec type, and enables or disables robbed bit signaling generation(server modem) or detection (client modem) using one to five subparameters. The command format is:+MS= <mod> [,[<automode>][,[<min_rate>][,[<max_rate>][,[<x_law>][,[< rb_signaling>]]]]]]<CR>Notes:1. For 14400 bps and lower speeds, the Nn command and S37 register can alternatively be used, in which case the +MSsubparameters will modified to reflect the Nn and S37=x settings. Use of the Nn and S37=x commands is notrecommended but is provided for compatibility with existing communication software. (S37 is not updated by the +MScommand.)2.   Subparameters not entered (enter a comma only or <CR> to skip the last subparameter) remain at their current values.Reporting Selected OptionsThe modem can send a string of information to the DTE consisting of selected options using the following command:+MS?The response is:+MS: <mod>,<automode>,<min_rate>,<max_rate>,<x_law>,<rb_signaling>For example,+MS: 56,1,300,56000,0,0 [RC56 default values]+MS: 11,1,300,33600,0,0 [RC336 default values]+MS: 10,1,300,14400,0,0 [RC144 default values]Reporting Supported OptionsThe modem can send a string of information to the DTE consisting of supported options using the following command:+MS=?The response is:+MS: (list of supported <mod> values), (list of supported <automode> values),(list of supported <min_rate> values),(list of supported <max_rate> values), (list of supported <x_law> values), (list of supported <rb_signaling> values)For example,+MS: (0,1,2,3,9,10,11,56, 64,69),(0,1),(300-33600),(300-56000),(0,1),(0,1) [RC56]+MS: (0,1,2,3,9,10,11,64,69),(0,1),(300-33600),(300-33600),(0,1),(0,1) [RC336]+MS: (0,1,2,3,9,10,64,69),(0,1),(300-14400),(300-14400),(0,1),(0,1) [RC144]
AT Command Reference Manual3-26 1048Subparameter Definitions1. <mod> = A decimal number which specifies the preferred modulation (automode enabled) or the modulation (automodedisabled) to use in originating or answering a connection. The options are:<mod> Modulation Possible Rates (bps) 1Notes0V.21 3001V.22 12002V.22 bis 2400 or 12003V.23 1200 See Note 29V.32 9600 or 480010 V.32 bis 14400, 12000, 9600, 7200, or 4800 Default for RC14411 V.34 33600, 31200, 28800, 26400, 24000, 21600,19200, 16800, 14400, 12000, 9600, 7200, 4800, or2400Default for RC56/RC336/RC288[RC56/RC336/RC288 only]56 K56flex 56000, 54000, 52000, 50000, 48000, 46000,44000, 42000, 40000, 38000, 36000, 34000, 32000 [RC56 only]64 Bell 103 30069 Bell 212 1200Notes:1. See optional <automode>, <min_rate>, and <max_rate> subparameters.2. For V.23, originating modes transmit at 75 bps and receive at 1200 bps; answering modes transmit at 1200 bpsand receive at 75 bps. The rate is always specified as 1200 bps.The modem may also automatically switch to another modulation (automode), subject to the following constraints:a. The modem may not be able to automatically switch from the current modulation (specified by <mod>) to someother modulation. For example, there is no standard way to automode from Bell 103 to V.23.b. The DTE may disable automode operation (see <automode> below).c. The DTE may constrain the range of modulations available by specifying the lowest and highest rates (see<min_rate> and <max_rate> below).2. <automode> is an optional numeric value which enables or disables automatic modulation negotiation using V.8 bis/V.8or V.32 bis Annex A. The options are:<automode> Option Selected Notes0Automode disabled1Automode enabled using V.8 bis/V.8 or V.32 Annex A DefaultThe default value is 1, which enables automode. Note, however, there are modulations for which there is no automaticnegotiation, e.g., Bell 212 (<mod> = 69).For <automode> = 0 (automode disabled, i.e., fixed modulation):a. If <max_rate> is within the rates supported by the selected modulation, the selected rate is that specified by<max_rate>. For example:+MS=10,0,1200,4800 selects V.32 bis 4800 bps fixed rate.b. If <max_rate> is greater than the highest speed supported by the modulation specified by <mod>, the startingrate is the highest rate supported by the selected modulation. For example:+MS=10,0,2400,14400 selects V.32 bis 14400, 12000, 9600, 7200, or 4800 bps.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 3-27c. To emulate issuance of the N0S37=x command sequence to select fixed mode operation, specify the<max_rate> and <min_rate> both to be the (same) requested speed, and <mod> to be the modulation for thatspeed. For example:+MS=11,0,16800,16800 selects V.34 16800 bps fixed mode (no comparable S37 command).+MS=10,0,12000,12000 selects V.32 bis 12000 bps fixed mode (same as N0S37=10).For <automode> = 1 (automode enabled, i.e., automatically selected speed and modulation):The modem connects at the highest possible rate in accordance with V.8 bis/V.8, or V.32 bis Annex A if V.8 bis/V.8 isnot supported by the remote modem.a. If <max_rate> is greater than the highest rate supported by the modulation specified by <mod>, the modemautomodes down from the highest rate of the selected modulation. For example:+MS=10,1,1200,24000 selects automoding down from V.32 bis 14400 bps.b. To emulate issuance of the N1S37=x sequence command, specify the modulation and the rate to startautomoding down from using <mod> and <max_rate>, respectively. Set <min_rate> to 300 to allow automodingall the way down to V.21 300 bps. For example:+MS=11,1,300,16800 selects automode starting at V.34 16800 bps (no comparable S37 command).+MS=9,1,300,12000 selects automode starting at V.32 bis 12000 bps (same as N1S37=10).3. <min_rate> is an optional number which specifies the lowest rate at which the modem may establish a connection. Thevalue is decimal coded, in units of bps, e.g., 2400 specifies the lowest rate to be 2400 bps. The default is 300 for300 bps.4.   <max_rate> is an optional number which specifies the highest rate at which the modem may establish a connection. Thevalue is decimal coded, in units of bps, e.g., 14400 specifies the highest rate to be 14400 bps. The default is 28800 for28800 bps.5.   <x_law> is an optional number which specifies the codec type. The options are:0 = µ-Law1 = A-LawNote that ATZ will reset the <x_law> selection to 0 (µ-Law).6. <rb_signaling> is an optional number which enables or disables robbed bit signaling generation in a server modem orenables or disables robbed bit signaling detection in a client modem. The options are:0 = Robbed bit signaling generation (server modem ) or detection (client modem) disabled (default)1 = Robbed bit signaling generation (server modem ) or detection (client modem) enabledNote that ATZ will reset the <rb_signaling> selection to 0 (disabled).Result Codes:OK Valid subparameter stringERROR Otherwise.
AT Command Reference Manual3-28 1048+Hn - Enable/Disable RPI and DTE SpeedThis command enables or disables Rockwell Protocol Interface (RPI) processing and sets the DTE speed. (Applicable onlyto modems supporting RPI and RPI+).+H0 Disable protocol interface and video ready mode.+H1 Enable RPI mode and set DTE speed to 19200 bps.+H2 Enable RPI mode and set DTE speed to 38400 bps.+H3 Enable RPI mode and set DTE speed to 57600 bps.+H11 Enable RPI+ mode (applicable only to modems supporting RPI). When in RPI+ mode, a link isestablished between the modem and the WinRPI or WinRPI95 host PC software driver to allowthe modem to support protocol (V.42bis/LAP-M/MNP2-5) connections with a remote modem. Thiscommand should only be used when the WinRPI or WinRPI95 driver software is installed in thePC.+H16 Enable video ready modeResult Codes:OK n = 0 to 3, 11, 16.ERROR Otherwise.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 3-293.2.7 AT** Command** - Download to Flash MemoryThe linear flash memory downloader in the modem firmware allows flash memory connected to the modem external memorybus to be upgraded with revised modem firmware. This process transfers (uploads) the upgraded modem firmware (data)from the host computer to the modem which transfers (downloads) the data to the flash memory device. Note that thisdownloader function must be provided in modem MCU firmware initially installed in external flash memory, i.e., thedownloader does not support the programming of blank flash memory.Programming the flash memory device is a two-step process.1. When the AT** command is issued, the modem firmware boot loader is invoked and the user will first load a flash loadmodule (FLM) into the modem's RAM. The FLM contains the programming algorithm for the flash memory device beingprogrammed and any messages that may be sent during the load process.2. The user will then load the new modem firmware which the FLM will then program into the flash memory device.Procedure:1. Install in the modem a flash memory programmed with the modem firmware; ensure that the flash memory device isprogrammed with the sector secure mode set to UNSECURE (AMD only), otherwise the device cannot be re-programmed in the modem.2. Put the FLM file and the new modem firmware file (e.g., V1400DS.S37) in an appropriate directory on the computer'shard disk.3. Configure the communications application program for a DTE rate of between 9600 bps and 57600 bps (57600 bps isfaster) and RTS/CTS flow control. A load at 57600 bps will take approximately 2 minutes; a load at 19200 bps will takeapproximately 6 minutes.4. Check the modem for response by typing AT.5. Initiate the download process using the AT**n command, where:AT** or AT**0 Download speed is the last sensed speed (recommended command).AT**1 Download speed is 38.4k bps.AT**2 Download speed is 57.6k bps.The "Download Initiated" message appears upon issuing the AT**n command.6. Perform an ASCII upload of the FLM file (e.g., AMDE.S37) from the host computer to the modem RAM using anindustry standard communications software or an equivalent process (ensure that all ASCII translation or pacing isturned off).To abort the load at this point, wait for the FLM download process to time-out, send a bad S37 record, or reset (POR)the modem. If the load process times-out, the modem must be reset (ATZ) before the FLM can be loaded again.7. After the FLM has been loaded, perform an ASCII upload of the new modem firmware hex file (e.g., RC288ACi.S37)from the host computer to the modem RAM using an industry standard communications software or an equivalentprocess. There will be a 3-second pause after the first record of the RC288AXX.S37 file is sent, which is the FLASHerase cycle. There is no turning back at this point.If the flash download fails (because of a bad .S37 record for example) or the upload is aborted, as long as the modemis not turned off or reset, it will remain in the flash load cycle and the upload can be re-attempted at step 7.A "Wrong Device" message is displayed if an incorrect FLM is used. In this case, restart at step 5 and upload thecorrect FLM file.A "Wrong Hex file or flow control" message is displayed if an incompatible hex file format is used (non-Motorola S3format) or if the DTE ignores flow control (the flash download uses both Xon/Xoff and RTS/CTS flow control). If thewrong format was used, reinitiate the upoad at step 7 using a correct firmware hex file.8. A "Device successfully programmed" message is displayed by the FLM at the completion of a successful download andthe modem will do a cold start.
AT Command Reference Manual3-30 10483.2.8 AT- Commands-SDR=n - Enable/Disable Distinctive RingThis command enables or disables detection and reporting of distinctive ring. The syntax is AT-SDR=n, where n is a numberfrom 0 to 7. One, two, or three distinctive ring types can be simultaneously enabled depending upon the value of n (bitmapped). The detected ring type is reported in the long form (verbose) of the result code by appending the ring type numberto the end of the RING message.-SDR=0 Disables Distinctive Ring. Any valid ring detected is reported as RING (default).-SDR=1 Enables Distinctive Ring Type 1.-SDR=2 Enables Distinctive Ring Type 2.-SDR=3 Enables Distinctive Ring Type 1 and 2.-SDR=4 Enables Distinctive Ring Type 3.-SDR=5 Enables Distinctive Ring Type 1 and 3.-SDR=6 Enables Distinctive Ring Type 2 and 3.-SDR=7 Enables Distinctive Ring Type 1, 2, and 3.Result Codes:OK n = 0 to 7.ERROR Otherwise.The n value bit map is:Bit 0=1 Enable RING type 1. RING type 1 is detected and reported as RING1.Bit 1=1 Enable RING type 2. RING type 2 is detected and reported as RING2.Bit 2=1 Enable RING type 3. RING type 3 is detected and reported as RING3.The ring types supported and the corresponding ring cadence detect criteria are:DistinctiveRing TypeRing Cadence Detect Criteria12.0 sec ON, 4.0 sec OFF.20.8 sec ON, 0.4 sec OFF, 0.8 sec ON, 4.0 sec OFF.30.4 sec ON, 0.2 sec OFF, 0.4 sec ON, 0.2 sec OFF, 0.8 sec ON, 4.0 sec OFF.Notes:1. The Ring Indicate (RI) output does not toggle on the first ring if AT-SDR_0.2. The RI output waveform is the same for all ring types detected, i.e., RI is on for the total duration of the ring period.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 3-313.3  ERROR DETECTION AND DATA COMPRESSION COMMANDS3.3.1 AT% Commands%C - Enable/Disable Data CompressionEnables or disables data compression negotiation. The modem can only perform data compression on an error correctedlink. The parameter value, if valid, is written to S41 bits 0 and 1.%C0 Disables data compression. Resets S46 bit 1.%C1 Enables MNP 5 data compression negotiation. Resets S46 bit 1.%C2 Enables V.42 bis data compression. Sets S46 bit 1.%C3 Enables both V.42 bis and MNP 5 data compression. Sets S46 bit 1. (Default.)Result Codes:OK n = 0, 1, 2, or 3.ERROR Otherwise.3.3.2 AT\ Commands\An - Select Maximum MNP Block SizeThe modem will operate an MNP error corrected link using a maximum block size controlled by the parameter supplied. Theparameter value, if valid, is written to S40 bits 6 and 7.\A0 64 characters.\A1 128 characters. (Default.)\A2 192 characters.\A3 256 characters.Result Codes:OK n = 0 to 3.ERROR Otherwise.\Bn - Transmit Break to RemoteIn non-error correction mode, the modem will transmit a break signal to the remote modem with a length in multiples of 100ms according to parameter specified. If a number in excess of 9 is entered, 9 is used. The command works in conjunctionwith the \K command.In error correction mode, the modem will signal a break through the active error correction protocol, giving no indication ofthe length.\B1-\B9 Break length in 100 ms units. (Default = 3.) (Non-error corrected mode only.)Result Codes:OK If connected in data modem mode.NO CARRIER If not connected or connected in fax modem mode.Note: When the modem receives a break from the remote modem, break is passed to the DTE as follows: In non-errorcorrection mode direct, the break length is passed; in non-error correction mode normal and in error correction mode, a 300ms break is passed.
AT Command Reference Manual3-32 10483.4  MNP 10 COMMANDS3.4.1 AT) Commands)Mn - Enable Cellular Power Level AdjustmentThis command is included only for compatibility and performs no function.)M0 )M0 command.)M1 )M1 command.)M2 )M2 command.Result Codes:OK n = 0 to 2.ERROR Otherwise.*Hn - Link Negotiation SpeedThis command is included only for compatibility and performs no function.*H0 *H0 command.*H1 *H1 command.*H2 *H2 command.Result Codes:OK n = 0 to 2.ERROR Otherwise.-Kn - MNP Extended ServicesEnables or disables conversion of a V.42 LAPM connection to an MNP 10 connection. The parameter value, if valid, iswritten to S40 bits 0 and 1.-K0 Disables V.42 LAPM to MNP 10 conversion. (Default.)-K1 Enables V.42 LAPM to MNP 10 conversion.-K2 Enables V.42 LAPM to MNP 10 conversion; inhibits MNP Extended Services initiation during V.42LAPM answer mode detection phase.Result Codes:OK n = 0 or 2.ERROR Otherwise.-Qn - Enable Fallback to V.22 bis/V.22This command is included only for compatibility and performs no function.-Q0 -Q0 command.-Q1 -Q1 command.Result Codes:OK n = 0 or 1.ERROR Otherwise.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 3-33-SEC=n - Enable/Disable MNP10-ECEnables or disables MNP10-EC operation. The command format is:-SEC=n,[<tx level>] where <tx level> is the optional transmit level sub parameter.-SEC=0 Disable MNP10-EC; the transmit level is that defined in S91.-SEC=1,[<tx level>] Enable MNP10-EC; the transmit level will be defined by the sub parameter <tx level>range 0 to 30 (0 dBm to -30 dBm), the default <tx level> (<tx level> not specified) is theS91 value.Result Codes:OK n=0, 1, or 1 and <tx level>=0 to 30ERROR OtherwiseExample: AT-SEC=1,18 enables MNP10-EC and sets the transmit level to -18 dBm.Note: If AT-SEC=0, the modem will automatically set AT-SEC=1 if the remote modem indicates Cellular in the V.8 bis/V.8phase or if a Cellular Driver is loaded and the Cell Phone is attached.InquiriesAT-SEC? Retrieves the current -SEC command settings, e.g., 1,18.@Mn - Initial Cellular Power Level SettingThis command is included only for compatibility and performs no function.@M0 @M0 command....@M30 @M30 command.Result Codes:OK n = 0 to 30.ERROR Otherwise.:E - Compromise Equalizer Enable CommandThis command is included only for compatibility and performs no function.:E0 :E0 command.:E1 :E1 command.Result Codes:OK n = 0 or 1.ERROR Otherwise.
AT Command Reference Manual3-34 10483.5 W-CLASS COMMANDS3.5.1 AT* Commands*B - Display Blacklisted NumbersThis command requests the modem to return a list of blacklisted numbers to the DTE. The format of the response is shownby the example below. Permanently forbidden numbers as defined by country requirements will not appear on this list. If nonumbers are blacklisted, only the OK result code is issued.Example:NO. - PHONE NUMBER ------- ------------------------------1; 41755376602; 82889249613; 38872788624; 31248394425; 6284664OK*D - Display Delayed NumbersThis command causes the modem to send a list of the delayed numbers together with the delay associated with each. Themodem will return a list of delayed telephone numbers as defined in the *B command. The format of the response is shownby the example below (delay times are shown as hours:minutes:seconds). If no numbers are delayed, only the OK resultcode is issued.Example:NO. - PHONE NUMBER -DELAY------ -------------------------------------------1; 8264734660 2:00:002; 7532634661 2:00:003; 2587334662 0:02:004; 7532651663 0:03:255; 7459931664 0:01:45OK
AT Command Reference Manual1048 3-35*NCn - Country SelectUp to four sets of country parameters may be stored in the EPROM. This command checks to see if the entered numbermatches the country code of one of the countries stored in the EPROM. If found, the modem stores the location of thatcountry in NVRAM. Upon power up or a soft reset (Z command), the modem uses this location to load the parameters forthe corresponding country. The default value of zero is used if no NVRAM is installed or the NVRAM failed self test duringreset.Note: Automatic DAA country code recognition is enabled by the *NC0 command (the 0 country code is reserved for thisfunction). Automatic DAA country code recognition is disabled by the *NCn command selecting any other valid country code.*NCn Select country parameters corresponding to entered country code (n). The country codes are:Country Code (n)Australia 40Austria 1Belgium 2Bulgaria 27Canada 20China 41Czech Republic 19Denmark 3Finland 4France 5Germany 6Greece 17Hong Kong 42Hungary 23India 30Ireland 7Israel 18Italy 8Japan 43Korea 44Luxembourg 9Mexico 21Netherlands 10New Zealand 48Norway 11Philippines 43Poland 24Portugal 12Russia 25Singapore 47Slovac Republic 26Spain 13Sweden 14Switzerland 15Taiwan 46United Kingdom 16United States 22Result Codes:OK If parameters corresponding to entered country code are present in EPROM.ERROR Otherwise.
AT Command Reference Manual3-36 10483.6  CALLER ID COMMANDS3.6.1 AT#CID Command#CIDn - Caller IDEnables or disables Caller ID.#CID=0 Disables Caller ID. (Default.)#CID=1 Enables Caller ID with formatted presentation to the DTE. The modem will present the data itemsin a <Tag><Value> pair format. The expected pairs are data, time, caller code (telephonenumber), and name.#CID=2 Enables Caller ID with unformatted presentation to the DTE. The modem will present the entirepacket of information, excluding the leading U's, in ASCII printable hex numbers.Result Codes:OK n = 0 or 2.ERROR Otherwise.Inquiries#CID? Retrieves the current Caller ID mode from the modem.#CID=? Returns the mode capabilities of the modem in a list with each element separated by commas.Formatted Form ReportingThe modem presents the data in the <tag> = <value> pair format as described in the table below. Spaces are present onboth sides of the equal sign.Tag DescriptionDATE DATE = MMDD where MM is the month number (01 to 12) and DD is the day number (01..31).TIME TIME = HHMM where HH is the hour number (00 to 23) and MM is the minute number (00 to59).NMBR NMBR = <number> or P or O where <number> is the telephone number of the caller, where Pindicates that the calling number information is not available since the originating caller hasrequested private service, and where O indicates that the calling number information is notavailable or out of service at the calling location.NAME NAME = <listing name> where <listing name> is the subscription name.MESG MESG = <data tag> <length of message> <data> <checksum> in printable ASCII hex numbers.This tag indicates a data item not listed above. The message is only possible for MultipleMessage Format.Notes:1. The modem does not present any Caller ID information if the DCE detects a checksum error in the Caller ID packet.2. In the event of an unrecognized data tag, the modem will present the data in ASCII hex numbers following the MESGtag.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 3-37Example of Formatted Form Reporting1. The following example illustrates the standard Caller ID message packet.RINGDATE = 0321TIME = 1405NMBR = 5045551234NAME = A N OTHERRINGRING2. The following example illustrates the case where the tag of the packet is not recognized by the modem.RINGMESG = 060342424231RINGRINGUnformatted Form ReportingThe modem presents all information and packet control information found in the message. The modem, however, excludesthe leading U's (channel seizure information) from the presentation. The packet is presented in ASCII printable hex numbers,the modem does not insert spaces, or line feeds, for formatting between bytes or words of the packet.The modem does not detect the checksum of the packet.Example of Unformatted Form ReportingRING0412303332323234303539313435353132333435RINGRING
AT Command Reference Manual3-38 10483.7 CELLULAR COMMANDSThe Direct Connect Modem allows a direct interface to most cellular telephones eliminating the need for other intelligentinterfaces.Landline modems operate with the telephone system by either going off hook detecting dialtone and the dialing thetelephone number using pulses or DTMF digits, or detecting the RING signal and answering the call. Intelligent cellularphone interfaces connect between the modems RJ-11 socket and the cellular phone's data interface. The interface provideslandline features to the modem (line current, dial tone, ringing, etc.), and translates the modem's signals (off hook, DTMFdigits, etc.) into signals that the cellular phone understands. Once connected the interface acts as a transparent link betweenthe modem and the cellular telephone.The Direct Connect Modem interfaces directly to the cellular phone's data interface and provides direct control over thecellular phones operation. For example if the user were to instruct the modem to dial using the ATDTnnnn command themodem would relay the telephone number and the SEND command to the cellular phone over the data interface.The modem connects to the cellular phone using a special cable which must be purchased separately. A different cable isrequired for each cellular phone or make of cellular phones. Below is a block diagram of a typical Direct Connect CellularModem (based on AK14-X270 Rev 4 reference schematic).3.7.1  Cellular Phone DriversThe data interface to cellular phones differs between manufacturers and models and requires a unique cellular phone driverfor each phone or group of phones. Therefore the particular phone driver needs to be downloaded from the PC into themodem's RAM before the modem can be used directly with the cellular phone. If a driver is not loaded the modem willoperate as a normal landline modem.3.7.2 Cellular Commands^C2 - Download Cellular Phone DriverThe ^C2 command initiates the cellular phone driver download function. Upon receipt of the command, the modem issuesthe "OK" message. The user then performs an ASCII download of the driver (in .S37 format) from the host to the modem,typically using a communications software package (with transmit pacing turned off).^C2 Download Cellular Phone commandResult Codes:OK[Download Process]OK Cellular phone driver download completed successfullyERROR Cellular phone driver download not completed successfully, e.g., checksum of record (in S37 file)is not correct, driver size is larger than 2k bytes, or an invalid driver is downloaded, or modem isconnected.^I - Identify Cellular Phone DriverThe modem reports the identification of the loaded cellular phone driver in response to the ^I command. The response isdependent upon the driver.Result Codes (Typical):CELLULAR DRIVER: OKI 900/910(c) Copyright 1994, Spectrum Cellular, Inc.Version 0.07 Thu Jan 10:29:52 1994OKorERROR Cellular phone driver is not loaded
AT Command Reference Manual1048 3-39^T6 - Indicate Status of Cellular PhoneThe status of the cellular phone connected to the modem is reported in response to the ^T6 command. The status isreported in a single byte formatted as a decimal number. The individual status signals assigned to the status byte bits are:bit 0 1 = Cellular phone is receiving an incoming callbit 1 1 = Cellular phone is in usebit 2 1 = Cellular phone is locked (cannot be used)bit 3 1 = There is no service for cellular phone (does not indicate signal strength)bit 4 1 = Cellular phone is powered onbit 5 1 = Cellular driver is initializedbit 6 0 = Reserved (0)bit 7 1 = Cellular cable detectedResult Codes (typical):128 (Cellular cable detected)OKApplication of ^T6 Status ByteThe information obtained by issuing a AT^T6 can be used to determine if the loading of the cellular phone driver is necessaryby the host software. A download is not necessary if landline (or no cable) is connected to the modem, in which ^T6 willreturn a value of 0 (bit 7=0). A download is necessary when a cellular cable is detected (implied cellular phone is alsoconnected), in which ^T6 will return a value of 128 (bit 7=1). Once a driver is downloaded to the modem, it will be able tooperate in landline or cellular mode based on detection of a cellular cable.3.7.3 OperationOnce the driver is loaded and the modem is connected to the cellular phone, and the phone is powered on dial/answerfunctions will be routed through the phone instead of the landline DAA, i.e., no special commands are needed to place oranswer calls, the same AT commands and software packages that are used for landline communication sessions can beused. If the cellular phone is not connected or is powered off dial/answer functions will be routed through the landline DAA,and if V.42 bis connection is established the cellular phone driver will be purged so that the V.42 bis dictionaries can beincreased to their normal size.While the modem is being used with a cellular phone it will respond with normal result messages with the followingdifferences in meaning:NO DIALTONE Indicates that cellular service is not currently available.RING Indicates that the cellular phone is receiving an incoming call.Modem ConfigurationModem performance will be improved by modification of your standard configuration; it is recommended that the landlinemodem also be EC compatible for reliable communications.Cell Site AT&FBase Site AT&F -SEC=1,18MNP10-EC is automatically enabled on the cell side when a cellular phone driver is loaded and the modem firmware detectsthat the cellular phone is attached, also in the V.34 products the modem is automatically configured to force the connectionin V.32bis mode.On the cell side the transmit level is defined in the cellular driver, therefore it is not necessary to set the level using the AT-SEC command.In the V.34 products on the landline side if MNP10-EC is disabled (AT-SEC=0), it will automatically be enabled if anotherV.34 modem is calling (V.8 bis/V.8 signal indicates cellular capability). No particular modulation will be chosen on the landline side. Therefore if a landside V.34 modem is NOT going to receive any calls from a V.32bis MNP10-EC modem it can beconfigured using AT&F -SEC=0,18 , otherwise use the configuration above.
AT Command Reference Manual3-40 1048In V.34 modems if MNP10-EC is enabled manually (using AT-SEC=1) no particular modulation will be chosen, therefore ifthe user wishes to force V.32bis modulation they should use the AT+MS=10,1,minspeed,maxspeed command (e.g.AT+MS=10,1,4800,12000 would force V.32bis and limit the speed between 4800 and 12000 bps). To allow V.34 modulationuse AT+MS=11,1,minspeed,maxspeed (e.g. AT+MS=11,1,4800,19200 would allow V.34 speeds between 4800 and 19200).When MNP10-EC is enabled in V.34 modes the symbol rate is limited to 3000, therefore the maximum speed would be26.4K however the initial connect speed is limited to 21600.If an AXCELL™ solution is used, a transmit level of -10dBm is required, therefore the following init string should be used:Cell Site AT &F -SEC=1,10It is recommended that systems be set up if possible with separate modems to receive calls from other land based modemsand cellular modems. This is so that land based users that experience high network attenuation do not have connectionproblems when communicating to modems configured for cellular operation.The above configurations are the minimum additional AT commands may be issued to change the result messages etc,AT&F is used to ensure that the modem is in a know state.Table 3-2 summarizes the mode and resulting transmit levels for both modems depending on their configuration.Fax ConfigurationIt is recommended that fax transmissions be configured to operate at 9600 bps in V.17 mode or 7200 bps in V.29 mode.Cellular Phone ConfigurationTo achieve the best operational performance, a cellular data connection should be attempted in a location where adequatesignal strength is observed for the cellular phone. This condition can be easily monitored on some phones with signalstrength indicator. In locations where even voice calls are unreliable, data connections should not be attempted. Under somecircumstances a special high gain antenna may improve performance.Additional information regarding the use of the cellular phone and cellular network should be obtained from the serviceprovider and or cellular phone manufacturer.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 3-41 Table 3-2. Remote Modem Configuration and Resulting Transmit LevelsRemote ModemConfigurationBase Site Configuration(Connected to PSTN)AT&F-SEC=0,x AT&F-SEC=1,xV.34 V.32bis V.34 V.32bisV.34DirectConnectAT&F Mod = V.32bisMode = -ECRTxlv = DriverBTxlv = xMod = V.32bisMode = Single -ECRTxlv = DriverBTxlv = -10Mod = V.32bisMode = -ECRTxlv = DriverBTxlv = xMod = V.32bisMode = -ECRTxlv = DriverBTxlv = xAT&F-SEC=1,x Mod = V.34Mode = -ECRTxlv = xBTxlv = xMod = V.32bisMode = Single -ECRTxlv = xBTxlv = -10Mod = V.34Mode = -ECRTxlv = xBTxlv = xMod = V.32bisMode = -ECRTxlv = xBTxlv = xV.32bisDirectConnectAT&F Mod = V.32bisMode = Single -ECRTxlv = DriverBTxlv = -10Mod = V.32bisMode = Single -ECRTxlv = DriverBTxlv = -10Mod = V.32bisMode = -ECRTxlv = DriverBTxlv = xMod = V.32bisMode = -ECRTxlv = DriverBTxlv = xAT&F-SEC=1,x Mod = V.32bisMode = Single -ECRTxlv = xBTxlv = -10Mod = V.32bisMode = Single -ECRTxlv = xBTxlv = -10Mod = V.32bisMode = -ECRTxlv = xBTxlv = xMod = V.32bisMode = -ECRTxlv = xBTxlv = xV.34PSTN AT&F Mod = V.34Mode = non -ECRTxlv = -10BTxlv = -10Mod = V.32bisMode = non -ECRTxlv = -10BTxlv = -10Mod = V.34Mode = Single -ECRTxlv = -10BTxlv = xMod = V.32bisMode = Single -ECRTxlv = -10BTxlv = xV.32bisPSTN AT&F Mod = V.32bisMode = non -ECRTxlv = -10BTxlv = -10Mod = V.32bisMode = non -ECRTxlv = -10BTxlv = -10Mod = V.32bisMode = Single -ECRTxlv = -10BTxlv = xMod = V.32bisMode = Single -ECRTxlv = -10BTxlv = xKey:Mod = Modulation negotiated (V.32bis or V.34)Mode = -EC = Both ends in MNP10-EC modeSingle -EC = one end in MNP10-EC modenon -EC = neither end in MNP10-EC modeRTxlv = Transmit level of Remote side modem in dBmBTxlv = Transmit level of Base side modem in dBmx = User defined transmit levelDriver = Transmit level defined in cellular phone driver.
AT Command Reference Manual3-42 10483.8  AT COMMAND RESULT CODESThe modem responds to commands from the DTE and to activity on the line by signalling to the DTE in the form of resultcodes. The result codes that the modem can send are described below.Two forms of each result code are available: long-form, an English-like "verbose" response, and short-form, a data-likenumeric response (included in parentheses following the long-form). The long-form code is preceded and terminated by thesequence < CR> < LF>. The short-form is terminated by < CR>, only with no preceding sequence.If result messages are suppressed, nothing is returned to the DTE. The long-form results codes can be modified by the OEMthrough the ConfigurACE Configuration Utility Program. (See ConfigurACE description.)OK (0)The OK code is returned by the modem to acknowledge execution of a command line.CONNECT (1)The modem will send this result code upon connecting when:1.  The line speed is 300 bps and the modem has been instructed to report the line speed to the DTE upon connecting, or2.  The DTE speed is 300 bps and the modem has been instructed to report the DTE speed to the DTE upon connecting, or3.  The range of result code responses is restricted by the X command such that no speed reporting is allowed.RING (2)The modem sends this result code when incoming ringing is detected on the line. What qualifies as a ring signal isdetermined by country-dependent parameters, modifiable through ConfigurACE.When cellular interface is selected, RING indicates that the cellular phone is receiving an incoming call.NO CARRIER (3)The modem sends this result code when attempting to establish a call if:1.  Ringback is detected and later ceases but no carrier is detected within the period of time determined by register S7, or2.  No ringback is detected within the period of time determined by register S7.This result code is also used when the modem auto-disconnects due to loss of carrier.Under X0, if busy tone detection is enforced, this result code is used as a response to the detection of busy or circuit busy.Under X0, if dial tone detection is enforced or selected, this result code is used to indicate that dial tone has not beendetected.ERROR (4)The modem returns this result code if the command line contains a syntax error or it is unable to execute a commandcontained in the command line. It is issued if a command does not exist or if the parameter supplied is outside the permittedrange.Under X0, X1, X2, and X3, this result is used instead of DELAYED and BLACKLISTED.CONNECT 1200 (5)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem sends this result code when:1.  The line speed is 1200 bps and the modem has been instructed to report the line speed to the DTE upon connecting, or2.  The DTE speed is 1200 bps and the modem has been instructed to report the DTE speed to the DTE upon connecting.(Also, see the W command.)NO DIALTONE (6)For X2 and X4, the modem sends this result code if it has been instructed to wait for dial tone during dialing but none isreceived.When cellular phone interface is selected, NO DIALTONE indicates that cellular service is not currently available.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 3-43BUSY (7)For X3 and X4, if busy tone detection is enforced, the modem sends this result code when attempting to originate a call if thebusy (engaged) signal is detected on the line.NO ANSWER (8)The modem sends this result code when attempting to originate a call if a continuous ringback signal is detected on the lineuntil the expiration of the timer S7.CONNECT 0600 (9)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem sends this result code when:1.  The line speed is 600 bps and the modem has been instructed to report the line speed to the DTE upon connecting, or2.  The DTE speed is 600 bps and the modem has been instructed to report the DTE speed to the DTE upon connecting.CONNECT 2400 (10)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem sends this result code when:1.  The line speed is 2400 bps and the modem has been instructed to report the line speed to the DTE upon connecting, or2.  The DTE speed is 2400 bps and the modem has been instructed to report the DTE speed to the DTE upon connecting.CONNECT 4800 (11)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem sends this result code when:1.  The line speed is 4800 bps and the modem has been instructed to report the line speed to the DTE upon connecting, or2.  The DTE speed is 4800 bps and the modem has been instructed to report the DTE speed to the DTE upon connecting.CONNECT 9600 (12)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem sends this result code when:1.  The line speed is 9600 bps and the modem has been instructed to report the line speed to the DTE upon connecting, or2.  The DTE speed is 9600 bps and the modem has been instructed to report the DTE speed to the DTE upon connecting.CONNECT 7200 (13)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem sends this result code when:1.  The line speed is 7200 bps and the modem has been instructed to report the line speed to the DTE upon connecting, or2.  The DTE speed is 7200 bps and the modem has been instructed to report the DTE speed to the DTE upon connecting.CONNECT 12000 (14)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem sends this result code when:1.  The line speed is 12000 bps and the modem has been instructed to report the line speed to the DTE upon connecting,or2.  The DTE speed is 12000 bps and the modem has been instructed to report the DTE speed to the DTE upon connecting.CONNECT 14400 (15)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem sends this result code when:1.  The line speed is 14400 bps and the modem has been instructed to report the line speed to the DTE upon connecting,or2.  The DTE speed is 14400 bps and the modem has been instructed to report the DTE speed to the DTE upon connecting.CONNECT 19200 (16)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem sends this result code when:1.  The line speed is 19200 bps and the modem has been instructed to report the line speed to the DTE upon connecting,or
AT Command Reference Manual3-44 10482.  The DTE speed is 19200 bps and the modem has been instructed to report the DTE speed to the DTE upon connecting.CONNECT 38400 (17)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem sends this result code upon connecting when the DTE speed is 38400 bps and themodem has been instructed to report the DTE speed to the DTE upon connecting.CONNECT 57600 (18)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem sends this result code upon connecting when the DTE speed is 57600 bps and themodem has been instructed to report the DTE speed to the DTE upon connecting.CONNECT 115200 (19)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem sends this result code upon connecting when the DTE speed is 115200 bps and themodem has been instructed to report the DTE speed to the DTE upon connecting.CONNECT 75TX/1200RX (22)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem returns this result code upon establishing a V.23 originate connection when the modemhas been instructed to report the DCE speed upon connection.CONNECT 1200TX/75RX (23)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem returns this result code upon establishing a V.23 answer connection when the modemhas been instructed to report the DCE speed upon connection.DELAYED (24)For X4, the modem returns this result code when a call fails to connect and the number dialed is considered 'delayed' due tocountry blacklisting requirements.BLACKLISTED (32)For X4, the modem returns this result code when a call fails to connect and the number dialed is considered 'blacklisted'.FAX (33)The modem returns this result code when a fax modem connection is established in a facsimile mode.DATA (35)The modem returns this result code when a data modem connection is established in a facsimile mode.CARRIER 300 (40)The modem returns this result code when a 0-300 bps data rate has been detected on the line and carrier reporting hasbeen enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)CARRIER 1200/75 (44)The modem sends this result code when the V.23 backward channel carrier has been detected on the line and carrierreporting has been enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)CARRIER 75/1200 (45)The modem sends this result code when the V.23 forward channel carrier has been detected on the line and carrier reportinghas been enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)CARRIER 1200 (46)The modem sends this result code when a 1200 bps data rate has been detected on the line and carrier reporting has beenenabled. (See S95 and Xn.)CARRIER 2400 (47)The modem sends this result code when a 2400 bps data rate has been detected on the line and carrier reporting has beenenabled. (See S95 and Xn.)CARRIER 4800 (48)The modem sends this result code when a 4800 bps data rate has been detected on the line and carrier reporting has beenenabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
AT Command Reference Manual1048 3-45CARRIER 7200 (49)The modem sends this result code when a 7200 bps data rate has been detected on the line and carrier reporting has beenenabled. (See S95 and Xn.)CARRIER 9600 (50)The modem sends this result code when a 9600 bps data rate has been detected on the line and carrier reporting has beenenabled. (See S95 and Xn.)CARRIER 12000 (51)The modem sends this result code when a 12000 bps data rate has been detected on the line and carrier reporting has beenenabled. (See S95 and Xn.)CARRIER 14400 (52)The modem sends this result code when a 14400 bps data rate has been detected on the line and carrier reporting has beenenabled. (See S95 and Xn.)CARRIER 16800 (53)The modem sends this result code when a 16800 bps data rate has been detected on the line and carrier reporting has beenenabled. (See S95 and Xn.)CARRIER 19200 (54)The modem sends this result code when a 19200 bps data rate has been detected on the line and carrier reporting has beenenabled. (See S95 and Xn.)CARRIER 21600 (55)The modem sends this result code when a 21600 bps data rate has been detected on the line and carrier reporting has beenenabled. (See S95 and Xn.)CARRIER 24000 (56)The modem sends this result code when a 24000 bps data rate has been detected on the line and carrier reporting has beenenabled. (See S95 and Xn.)CARRIER 26400 (57)The modem sends this result code when a 26400 bps data rate has been detected on the line and carrier reporting has beenenabled. (See S95 and Xn.)CARRIER 28800 (58)The modem sends this result code when a 28800 bps data rate has been detected on the line and carrier reporting has beenenabled. (See S95 and Xn.)CONNECT 16800 (59)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem returns this result code upon connecting when the DTE speed is 16800 bps and themodem has been instructed to report the DTE speed upon connecting.CONNECT 21600 (61)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem returns this result code upon connecting when the DTE speed is 21600 bps and themodem has been instructed to report the DTE speed upon connecting.CONNECT 24000 (62)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem returns this result code upon connecting when the DTE speed is 24000 bps and themodem has been instructed to report the DTE speed upon connecting.CONNECT 26400 (63)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem returns this result code upon connecting when the DTE speed is 26400 bps and themodem has been instructed to report the DTE speed upon connecting.
AT Command Reference Manual3-46 1048CONNECT 28800 (64)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem returns this result code upon connecting when the DTE speed is 28800 bps and themodem has been instructed to report the DTE speed upon connecting.COMPRESSION: CLASS 5 (66)This message is sent to the DTE when the modem has connected in MNP Class 5 and COMPRESSION message reportinghas been enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)COMPRESSION: V.42 bis (67)This message is sent to the DTE when the modem has connected in V.42 bis and COMPRESSION message reporting hasbeen enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)COMPRESSION: NONE (69)This message is sent to the DTE when the modem has connected without data compression and COMPRESSION messagereporting has been enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)PROTOCOL: NONE (70)This message is sent to the DTE when the modem has connected without any form of error correction, and the PROTOCOLmessage reporting has been enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)PROTOCOL: LAPM (77)This message is sent to the DTE when the modem has connected in the V.42 LAPM mode of error correction, andPROTOCOL message reporting has been enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)CARRIER 31200 (78)The modem sends this result code when a 31200 bps data rate has been detected on the line and carrier reporting has beenenabled. (See S95 and Xn.)CARRIER 33600 (79)The modem sends this result code when a 33600 bps data rate has been detected on the line and carrier reporting has beenenabled. (See S95 and Xn.)PROTOCOL: ALT (80)This message is sent to the DTE when the modem has connected in the MNP mode of error correction, and PROTOCOLmessage reporting has been enabled. (See S95 and Xn.)PROTOCOL: ALT-CELLULAR (81)This message is sent to the DTE when the modem has connected in the MNP 10 mode and cellular power level adjustmentis enabled (")M1 or )M2").(See S95 and Xn.)CONNECT 33600 (84)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem returns this result code upon connecting when the DTE speed is 33600 bps and themodem has been instructed to report the DTE speed upon connecting.CONNECT 31200 (91)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem returns this result code upon connecting when the DTE speed is 31200 bps and themodem has been instructed to report the DTE speed upon connecting.CARRIER 32000 (150)The modem sends this result code when a 32000 bps data rate has been detected on the line and carrier reporting has beenenabled. (See S95 and Xn.)CARRIER 34000 (151)The modem sends this result code when a 34000 bps data rate has been detected on the line and carrier reporting has beenenabled. (See S95 and Xn.)
AT Command Reference Manual1048 3-47CARRIER 36000 (152)The modem sends this result code when a 36000 bps data rate has been detected on the line and carrier reporting has beenenabled. (See S95 and Xn.)CARRIER 38000 (153)The modem sends this result code when a 38000 bps data rate has been detected on the line and carrier reporting has beenenabled. (See S95 and Xn.)CARRIER 40000 (154)The modem sends this result code when a 40000 bps data rate has been detected on the line and carrier reporting has beenenabled. (See S95 and Xn.)CARRIER 42000 (155)The modem sends this result code when a 42000 bps data rate has been detected on the line and carrier reporting has beenenabled. (See S95 and Xn.)CARRIER 44000 (156)The modem sends this result code when a 44000 bps data rate has been detected on the line and carrier reporting has beenenabled. (See S95 and Xn.)CARRIER 46000 (157)The modem sends this result code when a 46000 bps data rate has been detected on the line and carrier reporting has beenenabled. (See S95 and Xn.)CARRIER 48000 (158)The modem sends this result code when a 48000 bps data rate has been detected on the line and carrier reporting has beenenabled. (See S95 and Xn.)CARRIER 50000 (159)The modem sends this result code when a 50000 bps data rate has been detected on the line and carrier reporting has beenenabled. (See S95 and Xn.)CARRIER 52000 (160)The modem sends this result code when a 52000 bps data rate has been detected on the line and carrier reporting has beenenabled. (See S95 and Xn.)CARRIER 54000 (161)The modem sends this result code when a 54000 bps data rate has been detected on the line and carrier reporting has beenenabled. (See S95 and Xn.)CARRIER 56000 (162)The modem sends this result code when a 56000 bps data rate has been detected on the line and carrier reporting has beenenabled. (See S95 and Xn.)CONNECT 32000 (165)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem returns this result code upon connecting when the DTE speed is 32000 bps and themodem has been instructed to report the DTE speed upon connecting.CONNECT 34000 (166)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem returns this result code upon connecting when the DTE speed is 34000 bps and themodem has been instructed to report the DTE speed upon connecting.CONNECT 36000 (167)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem returns this result code upon connecting when the DTE speed is 36000 bps and themodem has been instructed to report the DTE speed upon connecting.
AT Command Reference Manual3-48 1048CONNECT 38000 (168)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem returns this result code upon connecting when the DTE speed is 38000 bps and themodem has been instructed to report the DTE speed upon connecting.CONNECT 40000 (169)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem returns this result code upon connecting when the DTE speed is 40000 bps and themodem has been instructed to report the DTE speed upon connecting.CONNECT 42000 (170)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem returns this result code upon connecting when the DTE speed is 42000 bps and themodem has been instructed to report the DTE speed upon connecting.CONNECT 44000 (171)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem returns this result code upon connecting when the DTE speed is 44000 bps and themodem has been instructed to report the DTE speed upon connecting.CONNECT 46000 (172)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem returns this result code upon connecting when the DTE speed is 46000 bps and themodem has been instructed to report the DTE speed upon connecting.CONNECT 48000 (173)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem returns this result code upon connecting when the DTE speed is 48000 bps and themodem has been instructed to report the DTE speed upon connecting.CONNECT 50000 (174)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem returns this result code upon connecting when the DTE speed is 50000 bps and themodem has been instructed to report the DTE speed upon connecting.CONNECT 52000 (175)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem returns this result code upon connecting when the DTE speed is 52000 bps and themodem has been instructed to report the DTE speed upon connecting.CONNECT 54000 (176)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem returns this result code upon connecting when the DTE speed is 54000 bps and themodem has been instructed to report the DTE speed upon connecting.CONNECT 56000 (177)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem returns this result code upon connecting when the DTE speed is 56000 bps and themodem has been instructed to report the DTE speed upon connecting.CONNECT 230400 (20)For X1, X2, X3, and X4, the modem returns this result code upon connecting when the DTE speed is 230400 bps and themodem has been instructed to report the DTE speed upon connecting.+FCERROR (+F4)This message is sent to the DTE when high speed fax data (V.27, V.29, V.33, or V.17) is expected and a V.21 signal isreceived.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 3-493.9  AUDIOSPAN AND DSVD COMMANDSAudioSpan and DSVD are two technologies that allow simultaneous voice and data operation using a Rockwell modemconnected to a telephone line. AudioSpan and DSVD implementations differ in the manner that voice and modem data arecombined. Voice and data channels are combined in the analog domain for AudioSpan and in the digital domain for DSVD.Establishing a AudioSpan or DSVD connection is analogous to establishing a regular data modem connection. Initiate thecall using normal dialing (ATD) and answering (ATA) procedures. The modem can switch from a regular phone conversationinto AudioSpan or DSVD mode and back to phone conversation. A handset, headset, or microphone/speaker can be usedfor voice communication during AudioSpan or DSVD mode.AudioSpan operates in normal (non-error corrected) or error-corrected/compression mode (MNP 5 or V.42 bis depending onthe error correction settings of the modems). The DTE rate must be equal to or greater than the anticipated DCE connectionspeed. In general, DTE speed of 38400 bps or higher should be used.3.9.1  Commands Supported by Both AudioSpan and DSVD-SMS= x, y, z, t - Select AudioSpan/DSVD ModeThe x parameter selects Data, AudioSpan, or DSVD mode, or enables automatic mode selection. The y, z, t parameters areoptional and are required only if the user wishes to control connection speeds. For example, AT-SMS=2 is sufficient toenable SVD.x: AudioSpan/DSVD/Data mode select and automatic mode select enable0 = Data mode1 = DSVD mode (A modem not supporting DSVD will respond with ERROR)2 = AudioSpan mode (A modem not supporting AudioSpan will respond with ERROR)3 = Automatic mode select (DSVD/AudioSpan/Data) (Default)Note: AT-SMS=1 performs the same operation at AT-SSE=1.y: Minimum data speed (bps) with audio for AudioSpan mode (see y value in following table)z: Maximum data speed (bps) with audio for AudioSpan mode (see z value in following table)Modulation Selected (See -SQS Command)y or z Value V.61 ML144 ML2884800 S ( y and z Default) S (y Default) S (y Default)7200 — S S9600 — S (z Default) S12000 — — S14400 — — S (z Default)S = Supported.— = Not supported.t: Symbol rate (ML288 modulation only)0 =  Auto Selection  (Default)1 - 6 =  ReservedThe symbol rate must be set to 0 for for normal operation (default). The other symbol rate selections are for testpurposes only.
AT Command Reference Manual3-50 1048NotesAudioSpan audio quality is dependent upon modulation mode, data rate and telephone line quality. Some guidelines are:1.  Higher quality telephone lines provide better audio quality than impaired telephone lines.2.  A lower data speed with audio provides better audio quality than higher data speed with audio. For example, aML288/9600 connection will be audibly superior to a ML288/14400 connection.3.  For identical data speed with audio using different modulations (e.g., ML144 vs. ML288), the audio quality at ML288 willbe superior. For example, a ML288/9600 will be audibly superior to a ML144/9600 connection.Examples1.  AT -SMS=2 selects AudioSpan Mode (the y, z, and t parameters are not required).2.  AT -SMS=2,4800,9600 selects AudioSpan Mode, specifies the minimum data speed with audio of 4800 bps, andspecifies the maximum data speed with audio of 9600 bps.Reporting Selected OptionsThe modem reports the selected options in response to the following command:-SMS?The response is:<x>, <y> <z>,< t>Example:-SMS?2,1Reporting Supported OptionsThe modem reports the supported options in response to the following command:-SMS=?The response is:(list of<x> values),(list of <y > values),(list of <z > values),(list of <t > values)Example:-SMS=?(0,1,2,3),(4800-14400),(4800-14400),(0,1,2,3,4,5,6)#VLS = x - Voice Line Select0 = Telephone handset (Default)5 = Headset6 = SpeakerphoneThe AT#VLS setting must be issued prior to establishing a DSVD or AudioSpan connection if a voice line other than thedefault telephone handset is desired.3.9.2  Commands Supported Only by DSVD-SSE= x - Enable/Disable DSVD0 = Disable DSVD (Default)1 = Enable DSVD (A modem not supporting DSVD will respond with ERROR)Note: DSVD mode can be enabled by either AT-SSE=1 or AT-SMS=1, and disabled by either AT-SSE=0 or AT-SMS=0.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 3-513.9.3  Commands Supported Only by AudioSpanThe following commands are applicable only for modems supporting AudioSpan mode. The command has no effect in DSVDmode. Modems that supports DSVD but not AudioSpan will report ERROR in response to these commands.-SQS= x, y - Select AudioSpan Modulationx: Select modulation mode0 = V.611 = ML144 (Default for RCV144)2 = ML288 (Default for RCV288)y: Enable/disable AudioSpan automatic modulation (automode) selection (V.61, ML144, ML288)0 = Disable AudioSpan automodulation Host selects AudioSpan modulation specified by the x parameter.If the selected modulation is not supported by the modem,ERROR is reported and the x parameter is not changed. If theremote modem does not support the selected modulation, themodem disconnects.1 = Enable AudioSpan automodulation  The modem starts with the AudioSpan modulation specified by thex parameter and falls back from ML288, to ML144, to V.61, or todata mode (e.g., V.34 or v.32 bis) depending on the selected xparameter, the remote modem capability, and line conditions.(Default.)Notes1.  The AT-SQS parameters should remain at default unless a particular modulation is preferred.2.  For identical data speed with audio using different modulations (e.g., ML144 vs. ML288), the audio quality at ML288 willbe superior. For example, a ML288/9600 will be audibly superior to a ML144/9600 connection.Examples1.  AT -SQS=2,1 enables AudioSpan automodulation starting with ML288 modulation.2.  AT -SQS=2,0 disables AudioSpan automodulation and selects ML288 modulation.3.  AT -SQS=1,0 disables AudioSpan automodulation and selects ML144 modulation.Reporting Selected OptionsThe modem reports the selected options in response to the following command:-SQS?The response is:<x>, <y>Example:-SQS?2,1Reporting Supported OptionsThe modem reports the supported options in response to the following command:-SQS=?The response is:(list of<x> values), (list of <y > values)Example:-SQS=?
AT Command Reference Manual3-52 1048(0,1,2),(0,1)-SMC= x - Enable/Disable ML144 Data Burst0 = Disable data burst1 = Enable data burst (Default)ML144 data burst can be enabled using the -SMC command in ML144 modulation. Data burst will keep the audio channelopen only when energy is detected on the handset or headset. When silence is detected in data burst mode, the connectedmodems will upshift in speed for higher throughput. Disabling data burst mode will keep the audio channel open at all timesduring the AudioSpan connection.Reporting Selected OptionsThe modem reports the selected options in response to the following command:-SMC?The response is:<x>Example:-SMC?1Reporting Supported OptionsThe modem reports the supported options in response to the following command:-SMC=?The response is:(list of<x> values)Example:-SMC=?(0,1)
AT Command Reference Manual1048 3-533.9.4 ExamplesExample 1: Establish a AudioSpan data connection between two RCV288 modems and use handset as audio interface.Both DTEs are set at 57600 bps:Originate Modem Answer ModemDTE DCE DTE DCE CommentsAT&F AT&F Reset modems.OK OKAT-SMS=2 AT-SMS=2 Enable AudioSpan with defaultsettings.OK OKATDTxxxx Originate modem dials remotemodem.RINGATA Answer DTE responds to RINGby answering.CONNECT 57600 CONNECT 57600 AudioSpan is established andusers can pick up handsets toconverse. The connect messagerepresents the DTE speed oneach side.<data> <data> Modems exchange data.Users hang up handsets toterminate audio link.+++ Originate modem enterscommand mode to prepare fordisconnect.OKATHNO CARRIER NO CARRIER Modems disconnect.
AT Command Reference Manual3-54 1048Example 2: Switch from normal handset conversation to AudioSpan data connection between two RCV288 modems. Theoriginate DTE is set to 57600 bps and the answer DTE is set to 115200 bps:Originate Modem Answer ModemDTE DCE DTE DCE CommentsUsers establish handsetconversation and both handsetsare off-hook.AT&F AT&F Reset modems.OK OKAT-SMS=2 AT-SMS=2 Enable AudioSpan with defaultsettings. Modems are awarehandsets are already being useddue to line current sensing.OK OKATD Originate modem initiates datanegotiation but will not actuallydial since the handset is alreadyoffhook.RING Answer modem detectsnegotiation sequence and reportsRING message to DTE.ATA DTE responds to RING byanswering.CONNECT 57600 CONNECT 115200 AudioSpan is established anduser’s can resume conversation.The connect message representsthe DTE speed on each side.<data> <data> Modems exchange data.+++ Answer modem enters commandmode to prepare for disconnect.OKATHNO CARRIER NO CARRIER Modems disconnect in AudioSpanmode but handsets are stilloffhook and conversation cancontinue. Conversation isterminated when both handsetsare hung up.Note: The transition from handset conversation to AudioSpan mode can take up to 8 seconds. The handsets will be silencedduring the negotiation period.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 3-55Example 3: Switch from normal handset conversation to AudioSpan data connection between two RCV288 modems innormal (non-error corrected) mode. Headset operation will be selected on the originate modem and speakerphone operationwill be selected on the answer modem as the audio interface during AudioSpan connection. The originate DTE prefers aML288/14400 connection for good audio quality and does not require high throughput. Both DTEs are set at 57600 bps:Originate Modem Answer ModemDTE DCE DTE DCE CommentsUser’s establish handsetconversation and both handsetsare off-hook.AT&F\N0 AT&F Reset modems. Normal modeoperation is selected by originateDTE.OK OKAT#VLS=5 AT#VLS=6 Handset mode selected fororiginate mode. Speakerphonemode selected for answermodem.OK OKAT-SMS= 2,14400 ,14400 AT-SMS=2 Enable AudioSpan. Originate DTEwishes to force a ML288/14400with audio connection.OK OKATD Originate modem initiates datanegotiation but will not actuallydial since the handset is alreadyoffhook.RING Answer modem detectsnegotiation sequence and reportsRING message to DTE.ATA DTE responds to RING byanswering.CONNECT 57600 CONNECT 57600 AudioSpan is established anduser’s can resume conversation.The connect message representsthe DTE speed on each side.<data> <data> Modems exchange data.+++ Answer modem enters commandmode to prepare for disconnect.OKATHNO CARRIER NO CARRIER Modems disconnect in AudioSpanmode but handsets are stilloffhook and conversation cancontinue. Conversation isterminated when both handsetsare hung up.Note: The transition from handset conversation to AudioSpan mode can take up to 8 seconds. The handsets will be silencedduring the negotiation period.
AT Command Reference Manual3-56 1048Example 4: Establish a ML144/7200 data connection between two RCV288 modems in headset mode, then switch tohandset later in the session so conversation can continue after modem call is hung up. This may be typical for configuring aninteractive gaming software. Both DTEs are set at 38400 bps:Originate Modem Answer ModemDTE DCE DTE DCE CommentsAT&F AT&F Reset modems.OK OKAT-SQS=1 Select ML144 AudioSpanmodulation.OKAT-SMS=2,7200,7200 AT-SMS=2,7200,7200 Enable AudioSpan with bothDTEs choosing ML144/7200 withaudio as the connection.OK OKAT#VLS=5 AT#VLS=5OK OKATDTxxxx Originate modem dials remotemodem.RINGATA DTE responds to RING byanswering.CONNECT 38400 CONNECT 38400 AudioSpan is established andheadsets are used forconversation.<data> <data> Send data betweeen modems.Users can pick up handsets toautomatically swtich to handsetmodes during AudioSpan. Aconversation can continue even ifone user picks up the handset. Inthis example, both users will pickup the handset.+++ Originate modem enterscommand mode to prepare fordisconnect.OKATHNO CARRIER NO CARRIER Modems disconnect in AudioSpanmode but handsets are stilloffhook and conversation cancontinue. Conversation isterminated when both handsetsare hung up.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 3-57Example 5: Originate modem places speakerphone call to remote handset which is connected to the answer modem. Theoriginate modem switches from speakerphone mode to establish a AudioSpan/Speakerphone data connection between twoRCV288 modems. The originate DTE is set to 57600 bps and the answer DTE is set to 115200 bps:Originate Modem Answer ModemDTE DCE DTE DCE CommentsAT&F#CLS=8#VLS=6#VRN=0 AT&F-SMS=2#VLS=6 Modems are reset. Originatemodem is configured forspeakerphone call. Answermodem is configured forAudioSpan speakerphone call.OK OKATDT5551212 RING Answer modem is called but userpicks up handset to establishconversation.VCONAT#CLS=0 Originate modem switches to datamode. Audio on both sides will bemuted while the originate modemis in #CLS=0.OKAT-SMS=2#VLS=6 Modem is configured forAudioSpan with speakerphonemode selected.OKATD Originate modem initiates datanegotiation but will not actuallydial since the handset is alreadyoffhook.RING Answer modem detectsnegotiation sequence and reportsRING message to DTE.ATA DTE responds to RING byanswering.CONNECT 57600 CONNECT 115200 AudioSpan is established andusers can resume conversationon speakerphone. The connectmessage represents the DTEspeed on each side.<data> <data> Modems exchange data.+++ Answer modem enters commandmode to prepare for disconnect.OKATHNO CARRIER NO CARRIER Modems disconnect in AudioSpanmode and speakerphoneconversation is terminated.Note: The transition from handset conversation to AudioSpan mode can take up to 8 seconds. The handsets will be silencedduring the negotiation period.
AT Command Reference Manual3-58 10483.10  SYNCHRONOUS ACCESS MODE3.10.1  Synchronous Access Mode CommandsThree commands support Synchronous Access Mode:+ES Enables and disables Synchronous Access Mode in the client or central site modem+ESA Configures the operation of the Synchronous Access Submode+ ITF Selects Transmit Flow Control ThresholdsEnabling Synchronous Access Mode enables the use of the 8-bit command characters defined in Table 9/V.80 of the DraftITU-T Recommendation V.80 (DATA COMMUNICATION OVER THE TELEPHONE NETWORK; In-Band DCE Control andSynchronous Data Modes for Asynchronous DTE).+ES - Enable Synchronous Access ModeThis extended-format command specifies the initial requested mode of operation when the modem is operating as theoriginator, optionally specifies the acceptable fallback mode of operation when the modem is operating as the originator, andoptionally specifies the acceptable fallback mode of operation when the modem is operating as the answerer. The commandformat is:+ES=[<orig_rqst>[,<orig_fbk>[,<ans_fbk>]]]This extended-format compound parameter is used to control the manner of operation of the V.42 protocol in the modem (ifpresent). It accepts three numeric subparameters:<orig_rqst> Specifies the initial requested mode of operation when the modem is operating as the originator.The options are:3 Initiate V.42 with Detection Phase. (Default.)6 Initiate Synchronous Access Mode when connection is completed, and Data State isentered.7 Initiate Frame Tunneling Mode when connection is completed, and Data State is entered.<orig_fbk> Specifies the acceptable fallback mode of operation when the modem is operating as theoriginator. This subparameter should not be commanded.<ans_fbk> Specifies the acceptable fallback mode of operation when the modem is operating as theanswerer. The options are:2 Error control optional (either LAPM or Alternative acceptable); if error control notestablished, maintain DTE-modem data rate and use local buffering and flow controlduring non-error-control operation. (Default.)8 Initiate Synchronous Access Mode when connection is completed, and Data State isentered.9 Initiate Frame Tunneling Mode when connection is completed, and Data State is entered.Examples:+ES=6 Enable Synchronous Access Mode originator (client modem only)+ES=,,8  Enable Synchronous Access Mode answerer (client modem only)+ES=6,,8  Enable Synchronous Access Mode originator and answerer (client modem only)+ES=7 Enable Frame Tunneling Mode originator (central site modem only)+ES=,,9  Enable Frame Tunneling Mode answerer (central site modem only)+ES=7,,9  Enable Frame Tunneling Mode originator and answerer (central site modem only)+ES=3 Disable Synchronous Access Mode originator+ES=,,2  Disable Synchronous Access Mode answerer+ES=3,,2  Disable Synchronous Access Mode originator and answerer
AT Command Reference Manual1048 3-59Reporting Selected OptionsThe modem reports the selected options in response to the following command:+ES?The response is:+ES: <orig_rqst>,<orig_fbk>,<ans_fbk>Example:+ES?+ES: 3,0,2 For the defaults.+ES: 6,0,8 Synchronous Access Mode originator and answerer enabled (client modem only)+ES: 7,0,9 Frame Tunneling Mode originator and answerer enabled (central site modem only)Reporting Supported OptionsThe modem reports the supported options in response to the following command:+ES=?The response is:+ES: (list of supported <orig_rqst> values),(list of supported <orig_fbk> values),(list of supported <ans_fbk> values)For example:+ES=?+ES: (0-7),(0-4),(0-9)+ESA - Configure Synchronous Access SubmodeThe operation of the Synchronous Access sub-Mode is configured by the +ESA parameter. The command format is:+ESA=[<trans_idle>[,<framed_idle>[,<framed_un_ov>[,<hd_auto>[,<crc_type>[,<nrzi_en>[,<syn1>[,<syn2>]]]]]]]]This extended-format compound parameter is used to control the manner of operation of the Synchronous Access Mode inthe modem. It accepts six numeric subparameters:<trans_idle> Specifies the bit sequence transmitted by the modem when a transmit data buffer underruncondition occurs, while operating in Transparent sub-Mode. The options are:0 In Transparent sub-Mode, modem transmits 8-bit SYN sequence on idle. Modemreceiver does not hunt for synchronization sequence (default and fixed).<framed_idle> Specifies the bit sequence transmitted by the modem when a transmit data buffer underruncondition occurs immediately after a flag, while operating in Framed sub-Mode. The options are:0 In Framed sub-Mode, modem transmits HDLC flags on idle (default and fixed).<framed_un_ov> Specifies the actions undertaken by the modem when a transmit data buffer underrun or overruncondition occurs immediately after a non-flag octet, while operating in Framed sub-Mode.0 In Framed sub-Mode, modem transmits abort on underrun in middle of frame (default).1 In Framed sub-Mode, DCE transmits a flag on underrun in middle of frame, and notifiesDTE of underrun or overrun.<hd_auto> Specifies whether or not, in V.34 half-duplex operation, additional procedures besides thosespecified in § 12/V.34 shall be performed by the modem when switching from primary channel tosecondary channel operation, and vice versa. This subparameter should not be commanded.
AT Command Reference Manual3-60 1048<crc_type> Specifies the CRC polynomial used while operating in Framed sub-Mode. The options are:0 CRC generation and checking disabled (default).1 In Framed sub-Mode, the 16-bit CRC is generated by the modem in the transmitdirection, and checked by the modem in the receive direction.<nrzi_en>  Specifies if Non Return to Zero Inverted (NRZI) encoding is to be used by the modem fortransmit and receive data. The options are:0 NZRI encoding and decoding disabled (default and fixed).<syn1>, <syn2>  Specifies the octet value(s) to be used while performing character-oriented framing. <syn1> is tobe commanded to 255 (FFh); <syn2> is not to be commanded.Reporting Selected OptionsThe modem reports the selected options in response to the following command:+ESA?The response is:+ESA: <trans_idle>,<framed_idle>,<framed_un_ov>,<hd_auto>,<crc_type>,<nrzi_en>,<syn1>,<syn2>Example:+ESA?+ESA: 0,0,0, ,0,0,255, For the defaults.Reporting Supported OptionsThe modem reports the supported options in response to the following command:+ESA=?The response is:+ESA: (list of supported <trans_idle> values), (list of supported <framed_idle> values),(list of supported <framed_un_ov> values), (list of supported <hd_auto> values),(list of supported <crc_type> values), (list of supported <nrzi_en> values),(list of supported <syn1> values), (list of supported <syn2> values)Example:+ESA=?+ESA: (0),(0),(0-1), ,(0-1),(0),(255),
AT Command Reference Manual1048 3-61+ ITF - Transmit Flow Control ThresholdsThe +ITF command determines the flow control thresholds used by the modem for transmit data from the DTE. Thecommand format is:+ITF=[<off>[,<on>[,<report_period>]]]This optional compound parameter allows the DTE to determine the input buffer size in the modem for data on circuit 103(transmit data) from the DTE, to control the threshholds used for flow control of such data, and to control how often themodem reports to the DTE the number of octets in this buffer. Note that the DTE can adjust its own threshholds for flowcontrol of data on circuit 104 (received data) from the modem.<off>  Determines the threshhold, in octets, above which the modem will generate a flow off signal.Applicable in Synchronous Access and Frame Tunneling modes. Default <off> value is 255.For the <on> and <off> subparameters, the input buffer is assumed to reside between themodem’s V.24 interface and the Synchronous Access protocol layer; i.e., the buffer countincludes all octets, including EM codes, received from the DTE, with the exception of DC1 andDC3 if these are used to signal <modem-by-DTE> flow control.The modem returns the ERROR result code if the DTE specifies that the <off> subparameter beset to a value less than or equal to the <on> subparameter; in this case, the current parametervalue settings are not modified.<on> Determines the threshhold, in octets, below which the modem will generate a flow on signal.Applicable in Synchronous Access and Frame Tunneling modes. Default <on> value is 64.<report_period> Not supported. A fixed value of zero is used and reported.Reporting Selected OptionsThe modem sends a string of information text to the DTE consisting of selected options in response to the followingcommand:+ITF?The response is:+ITF: <off>,<on>,<report_period>Example:+ITF?+ITF: 255,64,0 Default valuesReporting Supported OptionsThe modem sends a string of information text to the DTE consisting of supported options in response to the followingcommand:+ITF=?The response is:+ITF: (list of supported <off> values),(list of supported <on> values),(list of supported <report_period> values)Example:+ITF=?+ITF: (0-255),( 0-255),(0)The maximum reported <off> value is the input transmit data buffer level at which the modem signals a transmit dataoverrun indication to the DTE.
AT Command Reference Manual3-62 1048This page is intentionally blank.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 4-14. S-REGISTERSThe S-Registers are summarized in Table 4-1 along with their default values; registers denoted with an '*' may be stored inone of the two user profiles by entering the &Wn command. One of these profiles may be loaded at any time by using the Zncommand. Registers or register fields quoted as “reserved” are reserved for current or future use by the firmware, or arepermanently overridden by PTT limitations. For the latter, control of the equivalent functionality is available with ConfigurACECall Progress and Blacklisting options.All bit-mapped registers are read-only. The appropriate AT command which controls the relevant bits in the S-Registershould be used to change the value.4.1 FACTORY DEFAULTSThe factory default values are stored in ROM and are loaded into the active configuration at power up or by the ATZncommand. In addition, the designated default profile is subsequently loaded, and may change some of the factory defaultvalues. The designated default profile can be changed by entering the &Yn command where n is one of the two possibleuser profiles.The defaults shown are those used by Rockwell in factory profiles zero and one. These may be overwritten by the OEM withConfigurACE prior to placing the firmware in PROM. Minimum and maximum values may also be imposed by ConfigurACEin response to country PTT requirements.The default values shown in Table 4-1 may vary by modem firmware configuration. Consult the MCU firmware release notesfor exact configuration.The factory default values may be loaded at any time by entering the &Fn command.
AT Command Reference Manual4-2 1048 Table 4-1. S-Register SummaryRegister Function Range Units Saved Default**S0 Rings to Auto-Answer 0-255 rings * 0S1 Ring Counter 0-255 rings 0S2 Escape Character 0-255 ASCII * 43S3 Carriage Return Character 0-127 ASCII 13S4 Line Feed Character 0-127 ASCII 10S5 Backspace Character 0-255 ASCII 8S6 Wait Time for Dial Tone 2-255 s * 2S7 Wait Time for Carrier 1-255 s * 50S8 Pause Time for Dial Delay Modifier 0-255 s * 2S9 Carrier Detect Response Time 1-255 0.1 s * 6S10 Carrier Loss Disconnect Time 1-255 0.1 s * 14S11 DTMF Tone Duration 50-255 0.001 s * 95S12 Escape Prompt Delay 0-255 0.02 s * 50S13 Reserved - - -S14 General Bit Mapped Options Status - - * 138 (8Ah)S15 Reserved - - -S16 Test Mode Bit Mapped OptionsStatus (&T)-- 0S17 Reserved - - -S18 Test Timer 0-255 s * 0S19 AutoSync Options - - 0S20 AutoSync HDLC Address or BSCSync Character0-255 - * 0S21 V.24/General Bit Mapped OptionsStatus- - * 52 (34h)S22 Speaker/Results Bit Mapped OptionsStatus- - * 117 (75h)S23 General Bit Mapped Options Status - * 62 (3Dh)S24 Sleep Inactivity Timer 0-255 s * 0S25 Delay to DTR Off 0-255 s or 0.01 s 5S26 RTS-to-CTS Delay 0-255 0.01 s 1S27 General Bit Mapped Options Status - - * 73 (49h)S28 General Bit-Mapped Options Status - - * 0S29 Flash Dial Modifier Time 0-255 10 ms 70S30 Disconnect Inactivity Timer 0-255 10 s 0S31 General Bit-Mapped Options Status - - * 194 (C2h)S32 XON Character 0-255 ASCII 17 (11h)S33 XOFF Character 0-255 ASCII 19 (13h)S34-S35 Reserved - - -S36 LAPM Failure Control - - * 7S37 Line Connection Speed - - * 0S38 Delay Before Forced Hangup 0-255 s 20S39 Flow Control Bit Mapped OptionsStatus--*3
AT Command Reference Manual1048 4-3 Table 4-1. S-Register Summary (Cont’d)Register Function Range Units Saved Default**S40 General Bit-Mapped Options Status - - * 104 (68h)S41 General Bit-Mapped Options Status - - * 195 (C3h)S42-S45 Reserved - - -S46 Data Compression Control - - * 138S48 V.42 Negotiation Control - - * 7S82 LAPM Break Control - - 128(40h)S86 Call Failure Reason Code 0-255 - -S91 PSTN Transmit Attenuation Level 0-15 dBm 10 (Country dependent)S92 Fax Transmit Attenuation Level 0-15 dBm 10 (Country dependent)S95 Result Code Messages Control - - * 0* Register value may be stored in one of two user profiles with the &W command.** Default values may be modified using ConfigurACE.
AT Command Reference Manual4-4 10484.2 S-REGISTER DEFINITIONSS0 - Number of Rings to Auto-AnswerSets the number of the rings required before the modem automatically answers a call. Setting this register to zero disablesauto-answer mode.Range: 0-255 ringsDefault: 0S1 - Ring CounterS1 is incremented each time the modem detects a ring signal on the telephone line. S1 is cleared if no rings occur over aneight second interval.Range: 0-255 ringsDefault: 0S2 - Escape CharacterS2 holds the decimal value of the ASCII character used as the escape character. The default value corresponds to an ASCII'+'. A value over 127 disables the escape process, i.e., no escape character will be recognized.Range: 0-255, ASCII decimalDefault: 43 (+)S3 - Carriage Return CharacterSets the command line and result code terminator character. Pertains to asynchronous operation only.Range: 0-127, ASCII decimalDefault: 13 (Carriage Return)S4 - Line Feed CharacterSets the character recognized as a line feed. Pertains to asynchronous operation only. The Line Feed control character isoutput after the Carriage Return control character if verbose result codes are used.Range: 0-127, ASCII decimalDefault: 10 (Line Feed)S5 - Backspace CharacterSets the character recognized as a backspace. Pertains to asynchronous operation only. The modem will not recognize theBackspace character if it is set to a value that is greater than 32 ASCII. This character can be used to edit a command line.When the echo command is enabled, the modem echoes back to the local DTE the Backspace character, an ASCII spacecharacter and a second Backspace character; this means a total of three characters are transmitted each time the modemprocesses the Backspace character.Range: 0-32, ASCII decimalDefault: 8 (Backspace)
AT Command Reference Manual1048 4-5S6 - Wait Time for Dial Tone Before Blind Dialing, or After “W” Dial Modifier (W-Class Models)1. Sets the length of time, in seconds, that the modem will wait before starting to dial after going off-hook when blinddialing. This operation, however, may be affected by some ATX options according to country restrictions. The “Wait forDial Tone” call progress feature (W dial modifier in the dial string) will override the value in register S6.2. For W-class models, S6 sets the length of time, in seconds, that the modem will wait for dial tone when encountering a“W” dial modifier before returning NO DIAL TONE result code.The modem always pauses for a minimum of 2 seconds, even if the value of S6 is less than 2 seconds.Range: 2-255 secondsDefault: 2S7 - Wait Time For Carrier After Dial, For Silence, or For Dial Tone After “W” Dial Modifier (US Models)1. Sets the length of time, in seconds, that the modem will wait for carrier before hanging up. The timer is started whenthe modem finishes dialing (originate), or 2 seconds after going off-hook (answer). In originate mode, the timer is resetupon detection of answer tone if allowed by country restrictions.2. Sets the length of time, in seconds, that modem will wait for silence when encountering the @ dial modifier beforecontinuing with the next dial string parameter.3. For US models, S7 sets the length of time, in seconds, that the modem will wait for dial tone when encountering a “W”dial modifier before continuing with the next dial string parameter.Range: 1-255 secondsDefault: 50S8 - Pause Time For Dial DelaySets the time, in seconds, that the modem must pause when the “,” dial modifier is encountered in the dial string.Range: 0-255 secondsDefault: 2S9 - Carrier Detect Response TimeSets the time, in tenths of a second, that the carrier must be present before the modem considers it valid and turns onRLSD. As this time is increased, there is less chance to detect a false carrier due to noise from the telephone line.Range: 1-255 tenths of a secondDefault: 6 (0.6 second)S10 - Lost Carrier To Hang Up DelaySets the length of time, in tenths of a second, that the modem waits before hanging up after a loss of carrier. This allows fora temporary carrier loss without causing the local modem to disconnect. When register S10 is set to 255, the modemfunctions as if a carrier is always present.The actual interval the modem waits before disconnecting is the value in register S10 minus the value in register S9.Therefore, the S10 value must be greater than the S9 value or else the modem disconnects before it recognizes the carrier.Range: 1-255 tenths of a secondDefault: 14 (1.4 seconds)S11 - DTMF Tone DurationSets the duration of tones in DTMF dialing (US models only). This value has no effect on pulse dialing.For W-class models, this parameter is a country parameter loaded by ConfigurACE.Range: 50-255 millisecondsDefault: 95 (95 milliseconds)
AT Command Reference Manual4-6 1048S12 - Escape Prompt Delay (EPD)Defines the maximum period, in fiftieths of a second, allowed between receipt of the last character of the three escapecharacter sequence from the DTE and sending of the OK result code to the DTE. If any characters are detected during thistime, the OK will not be sent. Note that sending of the OK result code does not affect entry into command mode. (See3.1.3.)Range: 0-255 1/50 of a secondDefault: 50 (1 second)S13 - ReservedS14 - General Bit Mapped Options StatusIndicates the status of command options.Default: 138 (8Ah) (10001010b)Bit 0 This bit is ignored.Bit 1 Command echo (En)0 = Disabled (E0)1 = Enabled (E1) (Default.)Bit 2 Quiet mode (Qn)0 = Send result codes (Q0) (Default.)1 = Do not send result codes (Q1)Bit 3 Result codes (Vn)0 = Numeric (V0)1 = Verbose (V1) (Default.)Bit 4 ReservedBit 5 Tone (T)/Pulse (P)0 = Tone (T) (Default.)1 = Pulse (P)Bit 6 ReservedBit 7 Originate/Answer0 = Answer1 = Originate (Default.)S15 - Reserved
AT Command Reference Manual1048 4-7S16 - General Bit Mapped Test Options StatusIndicates the test in progress status.Default: 0Bit 0 Local analog loopback0 = Disabled (Default.)1 = Enabled (&T1)Bit 1 Not usedBit 2 Local digital loopback0 = Disabled (Default.)1 = Enabled (&T3)Bit 3 Remote digital loopback (RDL) status0 = Modem not in RDL (Default.)1 = RDL in progressBit 4 RDL requested (AT&T6)0 = RDL not requested (Default.)1 = RDL requested (&T6)Bit 5 RDL with self test0 = Disabled (Default.)1 = Enabled (&T7)Bit 6 Local analog loopback (LAL) with self test0 = Disabled (Default.)1 = Enabled (&T8)Bit 7 Not usedS17 - ReservedS18 - Test TimerSets the length of time, in seconds, that the modem conducts a test (commanded by &Tn) before returning to the commandmode. If this register value is zero, the test will not automatically terminate; the test must be terminated from the commandmode by issuing an &T0 or H command. When S18 is non-zero, the modem returns the OK message upon test termination.Range: 0-255 secondsDefault: 0
AT Command Reference Manual4-8 1048S19 - AutoSync Bit Mapped OptionsDefines the options for AutoSync operation (see &Q4 command). S19 must be set to the desired value before &Q4 isissued.Default: 0Bit 0 ReservedBit 1 BSC/HDLC format select0 = BSC selected (Default.)1 = HDLC selectedBit 2 Address detection enable/disable0 = Disabled (Default.)1 = EnabledBit 3 NRZI/NZI coding select0 = NRZI (Default.)1 = NZIBit 4 Idle indicator select0 = Mark idle (Default.)1 = Flag or sync idleBits 5 - 7 ReservedS20 - AutoSync HDLC Address or BSC Sync CharacterDefines the HDLC address (S19 bit 1 = 1) or BSC Sync Character (S19 bit 1 = 0) for AutoSync operation (see &Q4command). S20 must be set to the desired value before &Q4 is issued.Range: 0-255Default: 0
AT Command Reference Manual1048 4-9S21 - V.24/General Bit Mapped Options StatusIndicates the status of command options.Default: 52 (34h) (00110100b)Bit 0 Set by &Jn command but ignored otherwise.0 = &J0 (Default.)1 = &J1Bit 1 ReservedBit 2 CTS behavior (&Rn)0 = CTS tracks RTS (&R0)1 = CTS always on (&R1) (Default.)Bits 3-4 DTR behavior (&Dn)0 = &D0 selected1 = &D1 selected2 = &D2 selected (Default.)3 = &D3 selectedBit 5 RLSD (DCD) behavior (&Cn)0 = &C0 selected1 = &C1 selected (Default.)Bit 6 DSR behavior (&Sn)0 = &S0 selected (Default.)1 = &S1 selectedBit 7 Long space disconnect (Yn)0 = Y0 (Default.)1 = Y1
AT Command Reference Manual4-10 1048S22 - Speaker/Results Bit Mapped Options StatusIndicates the status of command options.Default: 117 (75h) (01110101b)Bits 0-1 Speaker volume (Ln)0 = Off (L0)1 = Low (L1) (Default.)2 = Medium (L2)3 = High (L3)Bits 2-3 Speaker control (Mn)0 = Disabled (M0)1 = Off on carrier (M1) (Default.)2 = Always on (M2)3 = On during handshake (M3)Bits 4-6 Limit result codes (Xn)0 = X04 = X15 = X26 = X37 = X4 (Default.)Bit 7 Reserved
AT Command Reference Manual1048 4-11S23 - General Bit Mapped Options StatusIndicates the status of command options.Default: 62 (3Dh) (00111110b)Bit 0 Grant RDL0 = RDL not allowed (&T5) (Default.)1 = RDL allowed (&T4)Bits 1-3 DTE Rate0 = 0 - 300 bps1 = 600 bps2 = 1200 bps3 = 2400 bps4 = 4800 bps5 = 9600 bps6 = 19200 bps7 = 38400 bps or higher (Default.)Bits 4-5 Assumed DTE parity0 = even1 = not used2 = odd3 = none (Default.)Bits 6-7 Guard tone (&Gn)0 = None (&G0) (Default.)1 = None (&G1)2 = 1800 Hz (&G2)S24 - Sleep Inactivity TimerSets the length of time, in seconds, that the modem will operate in normal mode with no detected telephone line or DTE lineactivity before entering low-power sleep mode. The timer is reset upon any DTE line or telephone line activity. If the S24value is zero, neither DTE line nor telephone inactivity will cause the modem to enter the sleep mode.Range: 0-255 secondsDefault: 0S25 - Delay To DTRSets the length of time that the modem will ignore DTR for taking the action specified by &Dn. Its units are seconds forsynchronous modes and one hundredths of a second for other modes.Range: 0-255 (1 second for synchronous modes 1; 0.01 second otherwise)Default: 5S26 - RTS to CTS DelaySets the time delay, in hundredths of a second, before the modem turns CTS ON after detecting an OFF-to-ON transition onRTS when &R0 is commanded. Pertains to synchronous operation only.Range: 0-255 hundredths of a secondDefault: 1
AT Command Reference Manual4-12 1048S27 - Bit Mapped Options StatusIndicates the status of command options.Default: 73 (49h) (01001001b)Bits 0,1,3 Synchronous/asynchronous selection (&Mn/&Qn)31 00 0 0 = &M0 or &Q00 0 1 = &M1 or &Q10 1 0 = &M2 or &Q20 1 1 = &M3 or &Q3100= &Q41 0 1 = &Q5 (Default.)110= &Q6Bit 2 Leased line control (&Ln)0 = Dial up line (&L0) (Default.)Bits 4 - 5 Internal clock select (&Xn)0 = Internal clock (&X0) (Default.)1 = External clock (&X1)2 = Slave clock (&X2)Bit 6 CCITT/Bell mode select (Bn)0 = CCITT mode (B0)1 = Bell mode (B1) (Default.)Bit 7 - Reserved
AT Command Reference Manual1048 4-13S28 - Bit Mapped Options StatusDefault: 0Bits 0 - 1 ReservedBit 2 Reserved (always 0).Bits 3 - 4 Pulse dialing (&Pn)0 = 39%-61% make/break ratio at 10 pulses per second (&P0) (Default.)1 = 33%-67% make/break ratio at 10 pulses per second (&P1)2 = 39%-61% make/break ratio at 20 pulses per second (&P2)3 = 33%-67% make/break ratio at 20 pulses per second (&P3)Bit 5-7 ReservedS29 - Flash Dial Modifier TimeSets the length of time, in units of 10 ms, that the modem will go on-hook when it encounters the flash (!) dial modifier in thedial string. The time can be limited as it is a country dependent parameter.Range: 0-255   10 ms intervalsDefault: 70   (700 ms)S30 - Disconnect Inactivity TimerSets the length of time, in tens of seconds, that the modem will stay online before disconnecting when no data is sent orreceived. In error-correction mode, any data transmitted or received will reset the timer. In other modes, any datatransmitted will reset the timer. The timer is inoperative in synchronous mode.Range: 0-255 tens of seconds (0-2550 seconds)Default: 0 (disabled)
AT Command Reference Manual4-14 1048S31 - Bit Mapped Options StatusDefault: 194 (C2h) (11000010b)Bit 0 Single line connect message enable/disable (\Vn)0 = Messages controlled by S95, Wn and Vn (\V0) (Default)1 = Single line connect message (\V1)Bit 1 Auto line speed detection (Nn)0 = Disabled (N0)1 = Enabled (N1) (Default.)Bits 2-3 Error correction progress messages (Wn)0 = DTE speed only (W0) (Default)1 = Full reporting (W1)2 = DCE speed only (W2)Bits 4-5 Caller ID (#CID)0 = Caller ID disabled (#CID=0) (Default)1 = Short (formatted) Caller ID enabled (#CID=1)2 = Long (unformatted) Caller ID enabled (#CID=2)Bits 6-7 Reserved (Default = 11b)S32 - XON CharacterSets the value of the XON character.Range: 0-255, ASCII decimalDefault: 17 (11h)S33 - XOFF CharacterSets the value of the XOFF character.Range: 0-255, ASCII decimalDefault: 19 (13h)S34-S35 - Reserved
AT Command Reference Manual1048 4-15S36 - LAPM Failure ControlDefault: 7 (00000111b)Bits 0-2 This value indicates what should happen upon a LAPM failure. These fallback options areinitiated immediately upon connection if S48=128. If an invalid number is entered, the number isaccepted into the register, but S36 will act as if the default value has been entered.0 = Modem disconnects.1 = Modem stays on-line and a Direct mode connection is established.2 = Reserved.3 = Modem stays on-line and a Normal mode connection is established.4 = An MNP connection is attempted and if it fails, the modem disconnects.5 = An MNP connection is attempted and if it fails, a Direct mode connection isestablished.6 = Reserved.7 = An MNP connection is attempted and if it fails, a Normal mode connection isestablished. (Default.)Bits 3-7 Reserved
AT Command Reference Manual4-16 1048S37 - Desired Line Connection SpeedThis register specifies the desired line connection speed.Notes:1. When the Nn command is issued or the S37 register value is modified, the +MS command subparameters are updatedto reflect the speed and modulation specified by the S37 value (see +MS command). For example:If N0 command is active, S37=10 updates the +MS command subparameters to reflect +MS=10,1,300,12000If N1 command is active, S37=10 updates the +MS command subparameters to reflect +MS=10,0,12000,120002. S37 is not updated by the +MS command.3. Use of the +MS command is recommended instead of the Nn and S37=x commands. Nn and S37=x commands aresupported for compatibility with existing communication software.Default: 0Bits 0-4 Desired line connection speed. This is interlinked with the Fn command (RC144). If an invalidnumber is entered, the number is accepted into the register, but S37 will act as if the defaultvalue has been entered.0 = Attempt automode connection. If N0 is active, connection is attempted at the mostrecently sensed DTE speed (+MS command settings are updated to theappropriate values). If N1 is active, connection is attempted at the highestpossible speed (+MS settings are updated to 11,1,300,2880 to reflect V.34,automode, 300 bps minimum speed, and 28800 bps maximum speed). (Default.)1-3 = Attempt to connect at 300 bps. F1 command (RC144).4 = Reserved.5 = Attempt to connect at V.22 1200 bps. F4 command (RC144).6 = Attempt to connect at V.22 bis 2400 bps. F5 command (RC144).7 = Attempt to connect at V.23.8 = Attempt to connect at V.32 bis/V.32 4800 bps. F6 command (RC144).9 = Attempt to connect at V.32 bis/V.32 9600 bps. F8 command (RC144).10 = Attempt to connect at V.32 bis 12000 bps. F9 command (RC144).11 = Attempt to connect at V.32 bis 14400 bps. F10 command (RC144).12 = Attempt to connect at V.32 bis 7200 bps. F7 command (RC144).Bits 5-7 Reserved
AT Command Reference Manual1048 4-17S38 - Delay Before Forced Hang UpThis register specifies the delay between the modem's receipt of the H command to disconnect (or ON-to-OFF transition ofDTR if the modem is programmed to follow the signal), and the disconnect operation. Applicable to error-correctionconnection only. This register can be used to ensure that data in the modem buffer is sent before the modem disconnects.1.  If S38 is set to a value between 0 and 254, the modem will wait that number of seconds for the remote modem toacknowledge all data in the modem buffer before disconnecting. If time expires before all data is sent, the NO CARRIERresult code will be issued to indicate that data has been lost. If all data is transmitted prior to time-out, the response tothe H0 command will be OK.2.  If S38 is set to 255, the modem does not time-out and continues to attempt to deliver data in the buffer until theconnection is lost or the data is delivered.Range: 0-255 secondsDefault: 20S39 - Flow Control Bit Mapped Options StatusDefault: 3 (00000011b)Bits 0-2 Status of command options0 = No flow control3 = RTS/CTS (&K3) (Default.)4 = XON/XOFF (&K4)5 = Transparent XON (&K5)6 = Both methods (&K6)Bits 3-7 Reserved
AT Command Reference Manual4-18 1048S40 - General Bit Mapped Options StatusIndicates the status of command options.Default: 104 (68h) (01101000b)Bits 0-1 MNP Extended Services (-Kn)0 = Disable extended services (-K0) (Default)1 = Enable extended services (-K1)2 = Enable extended services (-K2)Bit 2 ReservedBits 3-5 Break Handling (\Kn)0 = \K01 = \K12 = \K23 = \K34 = \K45 = \K5 (Default.)Bits 6-7 MNP block size (\An)0 = 64 chars (\A0)1 = 128 chars (\A1) (Default.)2 = 192 chars (\A2)3 = 256 chars (\A3)
AT Command Reference Manual1048 4-19S41 - General Bit Mapped Options StatusIndicates the status of command options.Default: 195 (C3h) (11000011b)Bits 0 -1 Compression selection (%Cn)0 = Disabled (%C0)1 = MNP 5 (%C1)2 = V.42 bis (%C2)3 = MNP 5 and V.42 bis (%C3) (Default.)Bits 2, 6 Auto retrain and fallback/fall forward (%En)Bit 6 Bit 20 0 = Retrain and fallback/fall forward disabled (%E0)0 1 = Retrain enabled (%E1)1 0 = Fallback/fall forward enabled (%E2) (Default.)Bit 3 ReservedBits 4-5 ReservedBit 7 ReservedS46 - Data Compression ControlControls selection of compression. The following actions are executed for the given values:Range: 136 or 138Default: 138S46=136 Execute error correction protocol with no compression.S46=138 Execute error correction protocol with compression. (Default.)S48 - V.42 Negotiation ActionThe V.42 negotiation process determines the capabilities of the remote modem. However, when the capabilities of theremote modem are known and negotiation is unnecessary, this process can be bypassed if so desired.Range: 0, 7, or 128 If an invalid number is entered, it is accepted into the S-Register, but S48 will act as if 128has been entered.Default: 7S48=0 Disable negotiation; bypass the detection and negotiation phases; and proceed with LAPM.S48=7 Enable negotiation. (Default.)S48=128 Disable negotiation; bypass the detection and negotiation phases; and proceed at once with thefallback action specified in S36. Can be used to force MNP.
AT Command Reference Manual4-20 1048S82 - Break Handling OptionsS82 is for compatibility purposes only, changing this register will not have any affect.S86 - Call Failure Reason CodeWhen the modem issues a NO CARRIER result code, a value is written to this S-Register to help determine the reason forthe failed connection. S86 records the first event that contributes to a NO CARRIER message. The cause codes are:Range: 0, 4, 5, 9, 12, 13, or 14Default:S86=0 Normal disconnect, no error occurred.S86=4 Loss of carrier.S86=5 V.42 negotiation failed to detect an error-correction modem at the other end.S86=9 The modems could not find a common protocol.S86=12 Normal disconnect initiated by the remote modem.S86=13 Remote modem does not respond after 10 re-transmissions of the same message.S86=14 Protocol violation.S91 - PSTN Transmit Attenuation LevelSets the transmit attenuation level from 0 to 15 dBm for the PSTN mode, resulting in a transmit level from 0 to -15 dBm, Insome countries, the transmit level may not be changed and there are checks to prevent transmit attenuation level changeusing ConfigurACE.Range: 0 to 15 dBm (Corresponding to 0 to -15 dBm transmit level.)Default: 10 (-10 dBm transmit level.)S92 - Fax Transmit Attenuation LevelSets the transmit attenuation level from 0 to 15 dBm for the fax mode, resulting in a transmit level from 0 to -15 dBm. Insome countries, the transmit level may not be changed and there are checks to prevent transmit attenuation level changeusing ConfigurACE.Range: 0 to 15 dBm (Corresponding to 0 to -15 dBm transmit level.)Default: 10 (-10 dBm transmit level.)
AT Command Reference Manual1048 4-21S95 - Extended Result CodesThe bits in this register can be set to override some of the Wn command options. A bit set to a 1 in this register will enablethe corresponding result code regardless of the Wn setting. Also, refer to Table 3-1.Default: 0Bit 0 CONNECT result code indicates DCE speed instead of DTE speed.Bit 1 Append/ARQ to CONNECT XXXX result code in error-correction mode (XXXX = rate; see Table3-1).Bit 2 Enable CARRIER XXXX result code (XXXX = rate; see Table 3-1.Bit 3 Enable PROTOCOL XXXX result code (XXXX = protocol identifier; see Table 3-1).Bit 4 Reserved.Bit 5 Enable COMPRESSION result code (XXXX = compression type; see Table 3-1).Bit 6 Reserved.Bit 7 Reserved.
AT Command Reference Manual4-22 1048This page is intentionally blank.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 5-15. FAX CLASS 1 COMMANDS5.1  FAX I/O PROCESSINGThe fax I/O interface supports asynchronous serial and parallel interfaces. The interface rate is 19200 bps. The characterformat is 8 bits data, no parity, and 1 stop bit. Start and stop elements are removed from the transmit data and added to thereceive data. Both transmit and receive data are buffered. Flow control using XON/XOFF (DC1/DC3) or RTS/CTS isprovided.Unique control character strings are identified, filtered, or reinserted into the I/O data stream. These control characters andtheir resultant action are described below.5.1.1  DTE-to-Modem Transmit Data StreamCharacters Detected Action Taken<DLE><data> Delete <DLE><data> characters.<DLE><ETX> Recognize as a string terminator and take appropriate action.<DLE><DLE> Replace with single <DLE> character.5.1.2  Modem-to-DTE Receive Data StreamCharacters Detected Action Taken<DLE> Insert extra <DLE> ahead of <DLE>.The modem also identifies the end of a frame by inserting <DLE><ETX> into the data stream after the FCS bytes.5.1.3  Fax Mode SelectionFax class 1 commands are identified in Table 5-1. Fax modes and rates are determined by the AT+F commands asdescribed in Section 5.2. Table 5-1. Fax Class 1 CommandsCommand FunctionService Class ID+FCLASS= Service ClassFax Class 1 Commands+FAE=n Data/Fax Auto Answer+FTS=n Stop Transmission and Wait+FRS=n Receive Silence+FTM=n Transmit Data+FRM=n Receive Data+FTH=n Transmit Data with HDLC Framing+FRH=n Receive Data with HDLC Framing5.1.4 Fax OriginationOrigination of fax calls is made using the ATD command. Upon completion of the dial function, a calling tone at 1100 Hz istransmitted, with a cadence of 0.5 seconds on and 3 seconds off. The modem automatically enters mode +FRH=3 andsends the CONNECT message to the DTE when FSK flags are detected from the remote.
AT Command Reference Manual5-2 10485.1.5 Fax AnsweringAnswering of fax calls is identical to answering of data calls with the exception that the modem enters the fax handshakingmode instead of the data handshaking mode after going off-hook. If +FAE=0, the modem, after sending answer tone,automatically enters fax mode (+FTH=3), sends the CONNECT message to the DTE, and starts sending FSK flags. If+FAE=1, the modem determines whether the caller is a data modem or fax modem and sends the DATA or FAX result code,respectively, to the DTE.5.1.6  Fax Control TransmissionFax control transmission is initiated by the +FTH=n command. After this command is issued, the modem generates theCONNECT message and transmits carrier in the modulation scheme specified by the parameter n. The modem thentransmits HDLC flags for a minimum of 1 second. The modem continues to transmit the HDLC flags until it receives acharacter from the DTE.When characters are received from the DTE, the modem adds start and end flags, performs zero-bit insertion, generatesFCS, and deletes <DLE><chr> character pairs before transmitting the characters to the remote fax machine. Each<DLE><DLE> sequence is transmitted as a single <DLE>. <DLE><ETX> is considered as the end of frame marker and isnot transmitted. All data received from the DTE after <DLE><ETX> is ignored by the modem until the modem generateseither the CONNECT, OK, or ERROR result code.If no more data is in the transmit buffer and the final bit was a 1 (bit 4 of the second byte received from the DTE), themodem generates the OK result code and returns to the command mode. If the final bit was a 0, the modem generates theCONNECT message and waits for further data from the DTE while transmitting HDLC flags. If no more data is receivedbefore 5 seconds elapse, the modem drops carrier, goes on-hook, and generates the ERROR result code.5.1.7  Fax Control ReceptionFax control reception is initiated using the AT+FRH=n command. After this command is issued, the modem looks for carrierin the modulation scheme specified by the parameter n. If no carrier is detected before the period of time specified byregister S7 expires, the modem generates the NO CARRIER message and returns to command mode. If a carrier isdetected that is not the one specified by the parameter n, the modem generates the +FCERROR message and returns tothe command mode. If the specified carrier is detected, the modem generates the CONNECT message and enters theHDLC receive mode.In HDLC receive mode, the modem receives HDLC frames from the remote fax machine, strips the flags, performs zero-bitdeletion, performs error checking, and handles <DLE><chr> character pairs before passing the data to the DTE. The modemprefixes each <DLE> character with another <DLE> character before sending it to the DTE. After the last byte in the frame,the modem sends <DLE><ETX> to the DTE marking the end of the frame. The modem then generates either the OKmessage if no errors were detected or the ERROR message if errors were detected (FCS is incorrect), and returns tocommand mode.While in command mode, the modem continues to receive data in the selected modulation scheme, and sends the data aftersending the CONNECT message to the DTE when the DTE reissues the +FRH command with the same parameter. If theDTE issues the +FRH command with a different parameter, the modem clears all buffers and proceeds as describedpreviously.If carrier is lost while in command mode and the DTE reissues the +FRH command with the same parameter, and there isno data in the buffer, the modem sends the ERROR result code to the DTE and returns to the command mode. If there isdata in the buffer, the modem sends the next frame of buffered data to the DTE, followed by <DLE><ETX>, and either theERROR result code if errors were detected or the OK result code if no errors were detected. The modem then returns tocommand mode.The modem concludes an error is detected if carrier is lost for any period of time during or before the reception of a frame. Ifcarrier is lost for a time period longer than the time specified by the register S10, the modem finishes delivering the data inthe receive buffer (if any) to the DTE, sends <DLE><ETX>, generates the ERROR message, and returns to commandmode. All subsequent data received from the remote is discarded.If the modem detects a frame abort sequence (seven consecutive ones with no zero insertion) while it is waiting for a framebeginning flag (it was receiving HDLC flags), it will wait for the HDLC flags again until either carrier is lost, or the DTE abortsthe process by sending an abort character or by dropping DTR with &D2 in effect. If the frame abort sequence is detectedwhile the modem is receiving a frame it finishes delivering the data in the receive buffer (if any) to the DTE, sends
AT Command Reference Manual1048 5-3<DLE><ETX>, generates the ERROR message, and returns to command mode. The modem keeps looking for HDLC flagsfollowed by more data from the remote, with the selected modulation scheme.If the modem detects a receive buffer overflow condition, it concludes that there was an FCS error in that frame. The modemwill receive more frames only if a starting flag is detected and there is room in the receive buffer. If a starting flag is detectedand there is no room in the buffer, the modem discards all data in that frame.If the modem receives any character from the DTE after the +FRH command (except flow control characters if software flowcontrol is in effect), or if the modem detects a high-to-low transition of the DTR signal while &D1 is in effect, it sends<DLE><ETX> to the DTE, generates OK result code, and returns to command mode. The receive buffer is cleared and alldata received from the remote is discarded. If the modem detects a DTR drop while &D2 is in effect, it goes on-hook, sends<DLE><ETX> to the DTE, generates OK result code, and returns to command mode. If the modem detects a DTR dropwhile &D3 is in effect, the modem performs a warm reset.5.1.8  Fax Data TransmissionFax data transmission is initiated by the AT+FTM=n command. After this command is issued, the modem generates theCONNECT message and transmits carrier in the modulation scheme specified by the parameter n. The modem thentransmits constant 1 bits for a minimum of one second and continues to transmit constant 1 bits until it receives a characterfrom the DTE.When data is received from the DTE, the modem deletes start and stop bits and deletes all <DLE><chr> character pairsbefore transmitting the data to the remote. Each <DLE><DLE> sequence is transmitted as a single <DLE>. <DLE><ETX> isconsidered as the end of stream marker, and is not transmitted. All data received from the DTE after the <DLE><ETX> isignored by the modem until the modem generates either the CONNECT, OK, or ERROR result code.If no more data is in the transmit buffer, and the last transmitted character was not an ASCII NULL, the modem generatesthe OK result code and returns to the command mode. If the last character transmitted was an ASCII NULL, the modemgenerates the CONNECT message to the DTE and waits for further data from the DTE while transmitting NULLs to theremote. If more data is received before five seconds elapse, the modem continues to transmit the data as described in theprevious paragraph. If five seconds elapse and no data is received from the DTE, the modem drops carrier, goes on-hook,and generates the ERROR result code.5.1.9  Fax Data ReceptionFax data reception is initiated using the AT+FRM=n command. After this command is issued, the modem looks for carrier inthe modulation scheme specified by the parameter n. If no carrier is detected before the period of time specified by registerS7 expires, the modem generates the NO CARRIER message and returns to command mode. If a V.21 carrier is detectedwhen a high speed carrier is expected, the modem generates the +FCERROR message and returns to the command mode.If the specified carrier is detected, the modem generates the CONNECT message and enters the data receive mode.While in data receive mode, the modem receives data from the remote, adds start and stop bits, and handles <DLE><chr>character pairs before passing the data to the DTE. The modem prefixes each <DLE> character with another <DLE>character before sending it to the DTE.If the modem detects a receive buffer overflow condition, it stops receiving from the remote until there is room in the receivebuffer. The modem informs the DTE of the buffer overflow after it sends to the DTE the last character that was stored in thebuffer before the overflow occurred.If the modem receives any character from the DTE after the +FRM command (except flow control characters if software flowcontrol is in effect), or if the modem detects a high-to-low transition of the DTR signal while &D1 is in effect, it sends<DLE><ETX> to the DTE, generates the OK result code, and returns to command mode. The receive buffer is cleared andall data received from the remote is discarded. If loss of DTR is detected while &D2 is in effect, the modem goes on-hook,sends <DLE><ETX> followed by OK result code to the DTE, and returns to command mode. If the modem detects a DTRdrop while &D3 is in effect, the modem performs a warm reset.
AT Command Reference Manual5-4 10485.2 COMMANDS+FCLASS=n - Select Service Class+FCLASS=n command sets the active service class.Parameters: 0-2Command options:+FCLASS=0 Select Data Mode (Default.)+FCLASS=1 Select Facsimile Class 1+FCLASS=2 Select Facsimile Class 2+F<command>? - Report Active Configuration+F<command>? interrogates the modem to determine the active configuration.Typical responses are:+FAE? 0 if auto answer is disabled; 1 if auto answer is enabled+FCLASS? 0 if in data mode; 1 if in fax class 1; 2 if in fax class 2+F<command>=? - Report Operating Capabilities+F<command>=? can be used to determine the operating capabilities of the modem.Typical responses are:+FAE=? 0 or 1+FCLASS=? 0, 1, or 2+FTM=? 24, 48, 72, 73, 74, 96, 97, 98, 121, 122, 145, 146+FRM=? 24, 48, 72, 73, 74, 96, 97, 98, 121, 122, 145, 146+FAE=n - Data/Fax Auto Answer+FAE=n allows the DTE to either restrict answering to class 1, or to automatically detect whether the calling station is a faxclass 1 modem or data modem, and answer accordingly.Parameters: n = 0 or 1Command options:n = 0 Disable data/fax auto answer mode. The modem answers as a fax modem only. (Default.)n = 1 Enable data/fax auto answer mode. The modem answers as a fax or data modem.After a data (not fax) connection is achieved (indicated by the DATA result code), the DTE must issue an ATO command tocause the modem to go on-line.+FTS=n - Stop Transmission and Wait+FTS=n causes the modem to terminate a transmission and wait for n 10-ms intervals before responding with the OK resultcode. An ERROR response code results if this command is issued while the modem is on-hook.+FRS=n - Receive Silence+FRS=n causes the modem to report back to the DTE with an OK result code after n 10 ms-intervals of silence have beendetected on the line. This command is aborted if any character is received from the DTE. The modem discards the abortingcharacter and issues an OK result code. An ERROR response code results if this command is issued while the modem ison-hook.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 5-5+FTM=n - Transmit Data+FTM=n causes the modem to transmit data using the modulation defined below. An ERROR response code results if thiscommand is issued while the modem is on-hook.Parameters: See Command optionsCommand options:+FTM=24 V.27 ter 2400 bps+FTM=48 V.27 ter 4800 bps+FTM=72 V.29 7200 bps+FTM=73 V.17 7200 bps long+FTM=74 V.17 7200 bps short+FTM=96 V.29 9600 bps+FTM=97 V.17 9600 bps long+FTM=98 V.17 9600 bps short+FTM=121 V.17 12000 bps long+FTM=122 V.17 12000 bps short+FTM=145 V.17 14400 bps long+FTM=146 V.17 14400 bps short+FRM=n - Receive Data+FRM=n causes the modem to enter the receiver mode using the modulation defined below. An ERROR response coderesults if this command is issued while the modem is on-hook.Parameters: See Command optionsCommand options:+FRM=24 V.27 ter 2400 bps+FRM=48 V.27 ter 4800 bps+FRM=72 V.29 7200 bps+FRM=73 V.17 7200 bps long+FRM=74 V.17 7200 bps short+FRM=96 V.29 9600 bps+FRM=97 V.17 9600 bps long+FRM=98 V.17 9600 bps short+FRM=121 V.17 12000 bps long+FRM=122 V.17 12000 bps short+FRM=145 V.17 14400 bps long+FRM=146 V.17 14400 bps short
AT Command Reference Manual5-6 1048+FTH=n - Transmit Data with HDLC Framing+FTH=n causes the modem to transmit data using HDLC protocol and the modulation defined below. An ERROR responsecode results if this command is issued while the modem is on-hook.Parameters: See Command options.Command options:+FTH=3 V.21 channel 2 300 bps+FTH=24 V.27 ter 2400 bps+FTH=48 V.27 ter 4800 bps+FTH=72 V.29 7200 bps+FTH=73 V.17 7200 bps long+FTH=74 V.17 7200 bps short+FTH=96 V.29 9600 bps+FTH=97 V.17 9600 bps long+FTH=98 V.17 9600 bps short+FTH=121 V.17 12000 bps long+FTH=122 V.17 12000 bps short+FTH=145 V.17 14400 bps long+FTH=146 V.17 14400 bps short+FRH=n - Receive Data with HDLC Framing+FRH=n causes the modem to receive frames using HDLC protocol and the modulation defined below. An ERROR responsecode results if this command is issued while the modem is on-hook.Parameters: See Command options.Command options:+FTH=3 V.21 channel 2 300 bps+FRH=24 V.27 ter 2400 bps+FRH=48 V.27 ter 4800 bps+FRH=72 V.29 7200 bps+FRH=73 V.17 7200 bps long+FRH=74 V.17 7200 bps short+FRH=96 V.29 9600 bps+FRH=97 V.17 9600 bps long+FRH=98 V.17 9600 bps short+FRH=121 V.17 12000 bps long+FRH=122 V.17 12000 bps short+FRH=145 V.17 14400 bps long+FRH=146 V.17 14400 bps short5.3 EXAMPLESExamples of calling (transmitting) and answering (receiving) one page using fax class 1 commands are shown in Table 5-2and Table 5-3, respectively.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 5-7 Table 5-2. Fax Class 1 Calling Sequence (One Page)DTE Commands DCE Responses(Host) (Modem) Remote Fax Notes(1) AT+FCLASS=1 (2) OK Set to Class 1PHASE A(3) ATDT6163 (4) Dials (5) Answers +FRH=3 implied by dialing(6) CONNECT (7) Send HDLC flagsPHASE B(8) Send NSF frame(9) <NSF>,OK(10) AT+FRH=3 (11) CONNECT(12) Send CSI frame(13) <CSI>,OK(14) AT+FRH=3 (15) CONNECT(16) Send DIS frame Last frame bit = 1(17) <DIS>,OK (18) Drop carrier(19) AT+FTH=3 (20) Send HDLC flags (21) Receive flags(21) CONNECT(22) <TSI> (23) Send TSI frame (24) Receive TSI Last frame bit = 0(25) CONNECT(26) <DCS> (27) Send DCS frame (28) Receive DCS Last frame bit = 1(29) Detect last frame bit(39) OK, drop carrier(31) AT+FTS=8 (32) OK, wait 80 ms(33) AT+FTM=96 (34) Send V.29(35) CONNECT(36) <TCF> (37) Send TCF data (38) Receive & check(39) OK(40) AT+FRH=3 (41) CONNECT(42) Send CFR frame Last frame bit = 1(43) <CFR>,OK (44) Drop carrier(45) OKPHASE C(46) AT+FTM=96 (47) Send V.29(48) CONNECT(49) age data (50) Send page data (51) Receive data(52) OK(53) AT+FTH=3 (54) Send HDLC flags (55) Receive flags(56) CONNECTPHASE D(57) <EOP> (58) Send EOP frame (59) Receive EOP Last frame bit = 1(60) OK, drop carrier(61) AT+FRH=3 (62) CONNECT(63) Send MCF frame Last frame bit = 1(64) <MCF>, OK(65) AT+FTH=3 (66) Send HDLC flags (67) Receive flags(68) CONNECT(69) <DCN> (70) Send DCN frame (71) Receive DCN Last frame bit = 1(72) OK, drop carrierPHASE E(73) ATH0 (74) OK, hang up (75) Hang up
AT Command Reference Manual5-8 1048 Table 5-3. Fax Class 1 Answering Sequence (One Page)DTE Commands DCE Responses(Host) (Modem) Remote Fax Notes(1) AT+FCLASS=1 (2) OK Set to Class 1PHASE A(3) FAX machine dials(4) RING(5) ATA (6) Modem answers(7) Send HDLC flags (8) Receive flags +FTH=3 implied byanswering(9) CONNECTPHASE B(10) <NSF> (11) Send NSF frame (12) Receive NSF Last frame bit = 0(13) CONNECT(14) <CSI> (15) Send CSI frame (16) Receive CSI Last frame bit = 0(17) CONNECT(18) <DIS> (19) Send DIS frame (20) Receive DIS Last frame bit = 1(21) OK, drop carrier(22) AT+FRH=3 (23) CONNECT(24) Send TSI frame Last frame bit = 0(25) <TSI>, OK(26) AT+FRH=3 (27) CONNECT(28) Send DCS frame Last frame bit = 1(29) <DCS>, OK (30) Drop Carrier(31) AT+FRM=96(32) Send V.29(33) CONNECT (34) Send TCF frame(35) <TCF> (36) Drop carrier(37) NO CARRIER(38) AT+FTH=3 (39) CONNECT(40) <CFR> (41) Send CFR frame (42) Receive CFR Last frame bit = 1(43) OK, drop carrierPHASE C(44) AT+FRM=96(45) Send page data(46) <page data> (47) Drop carrier(48) NO CARRIERPHASE D(49) AT+FRH=3 (50) CONNECT(51) Send EOP frame Last frame bit = 1(52) <EOP>, OK(53) AT+FTH=3 (54) CONNECT(55) <MCF> (56) Send MCF frame (57) Receive MCF Last frame bit = 1(58) OK, drop carrier(59) AT+FRH=3 (60) CONNECT(61) Send DCN frame Last frame bit = 1(62) <DCN>, OKPHASE E(73) ATH0 (74) OK, hang up (75) Hang up
AT Command Reference Manual1048 6-16. FAX CLASS 2 COMMANDSThe fax class 2 commands are summarized in Table 6-1.6.1  COMMAND SYNTAX AND GUIDELINES6.1.1 DTE CommandsThe ISO 646 character set (CCITT T.50 International Alphabet 5, American Standard Code for Information Interchange) isused for the issuance of commands and responses. Only the low-order 7 bits of each character are used for commands orparameters; the high order bit is ignored. Upper case characters are equivalent to lower case characters.For Phase C data transmission or reception, all 8 bits are needed.DTE Command LinesA command line is a string of characters sent from a DTE to the modem (DCE) while the modem is in a command state. Acommand line has a prefix, a body, and a terminator. Each command line (with the exception of the A/ command) mustbegin with the character sequence AT and must be terminated by a carriage return. Commands entered in upper case orlower case are accepted, but both the A and T must be of the same case, i.e., "AT" = ASCII 065, 084 or “at” = ASCII 097,116. The body is a string of commands restricted to printable ASCII characters (032 - 126). Space characters (ASCII 032)and control characters other than CR (ASCII 013) and BS (ASCII 010) in the command string are ignored. The defaultterminator is the ASCII <CR> character. Characters that precede the AT prefix are ignored. The command line interpretationbegins upon receipt of the carriage return character.Facsimile Command SyntaxAfter the "AT" or "at" prefix, facsimile commands use extended syntax. Each command is preceded by the “+F” characterand consists of single characters and a decimal parameter (if applicable) terminated by the semicolon “:” character (ASCII059) or by the <CR> that terminated the command line. A missing decimal parameter is evaluated as 0.For example, the command to instruct the modem to automatically answer a data or fax call and also enable reception is:AT+FAE=0; +FCR 1 <CR>Basic data mode and fax service class mode select commands are:AT+FCLASS=0 <CR> for Data ModeAT+FCLASS=1 <CR> for Service Class 1 FaxAT+FCLASS=2 <CR> for Service Class 2 FaxIn Class 2, the DCE makes and terminates calls, manages the communication session and negotiates (T.30 protocol) andtransports the image date to DTE. The T.4 protocol management of image data, etc., is done by DTE.The response toAT+FCLASS= 0<CR> in Data ModeorAT+FCLASS=2<CR> in Service Class 2 FaxisOKThe service class may be set by the DTE from the choices available using the “+FCLASS=<VALUE>” command.General Rules1. +Fnnn commands must be entered completely, otherwise an ERROR response is sent.2. All response messages are preceded and followed by <CR><LF>. Multiple response commands (e.g., +FDIS: +FCSI:and +FDCS:) will, therefore, appear to a have a blank line between them.
AT Command Reference Manual6-2 10483. Fax Class 2 commands can be separated by the “:” character. The “;” character can be omitted if desired. Note thatnon-data commands cannot be separated by the “;” which is allowed as a dial modifier. Table 6-1. Fax Class 2 CommandsCommand FunctionService Class ID+FCLASS= Service ClassClass 2 Action CommandsD Originate a CallA Answer a Call+FDT Data Transmission+FET=N Transmit Page Punctuation+FDR Begin or Continue Phase C Receive Data+FK Session TerminationClass 2 DCE Responses+FCON Facsimile Connection Response+FDCS: Report Current Session+FDIS: Report Remote Identification+FCFR Indicate Confirmation to Receive+FTSI: Report the Transmit Station ID+FCSI: Report the Called Station ID+FPTS: Page Transfer Status+FET: Post Page Message Response+FHNG Call Termination with StatusClass 2 Session Parameters+FMFR? Identify Manufacturer+FMDL? Identify Model+FREV? Identify Revision+FDCC= DCE Capabilities Parameters+FDIS= Current Sessions Parameters+FDCS= Current Session Results+FLID= Local ID String+FCR Capability to Receive+FPTS= Page Transfer Status+FCR= Capability to Receive+FAE Adaptive Answer+FBUF? Buffer Size (Read Only)+FPHCTO Phase C Time Out+FAXERR Fax Error Value+FBOR Phase C Data Bit Order
AT Command Reference Manual1048 6-34. All Class 2 commands are assumed to be the final command on a command line. Additional characters will be ignored.5. An ERROR message will be generated if any of the following conditions occur:a. A Class 1 command is received while in Class 2.b. A Class 2 command is received while in Class 1.c. A Class 1 or Class 2 action command is received while in data modem mode.d. A Class 2 read-only parameter is given the “=” form of a +F command (e.g., AT+FAXERR=5).e. A Class 2 action command is given the inappropriate “=” or “=?” form (e.g., AT+FDR=?).6.1.2  Serial Port Speed and Flow ControlDuring fax mode, the DTE-DCE port speed is 19200 bps.The DCE provides a speed buffer of 1024 bytes and provides the DC1/DC3 (XON/XOFF) or RTS/CTS method of controllingthe data into the buffer. This flow control is controlled by the &K3 or &K4 command.This method of data flow control is available only for DTE to DCE direction of data. There is no provision for data flow controlfrom DCE to DTE.Data Stream TerminationThe DCE exchanges streams of data with the DTE while executing data transfer commands. These data streams use thetermination described in Section 3.2/ISO 2111.The ASCII <DLE> character (016) is used as a special character to shield special characters. The <DLE><ETX> characterpair (<106><003>) is used to mark the end of a stream. The following patterns are used:any data...<DLE><ETX> end of streamany data...<DLE><DLE> single <DLE> in dataany data...<DLE><any byte> delete <DLE><any byte>DTE to DCE StreamsThe DCE filters the data stream from the DTE, and removes all character pairs beginning with <DLE>. The DCE recognizes<DLE><ETX> as the stream terminator. The DCE recognizes <DLE><DLE> and reinserts a single <DLE> in its place.The DTE must filter stream data to the DCE, and insert extra <DLE> characters ahead of data.DCE to DTE StreamsThe DTE must filter the data stream from the DCE, and remove all character pairs beginning with <DLE>. The DTE mustrecognize <DLE><ETX> as the stream terminator. The DTE must recognize <DLE><DLE> and reinsert a single <DLE> in itsplace.The DCE filters stream data to the DTE, and inserts extra <DLE> characters ahead of data.6.1.3 Auto AnswerThe DCE can answer as a data DCE or as a fax DCE. It can answer the call adaptively, i.e., it can determine whether thecall is 'data' or 'fax'. The +FAA parameter controls this feature. Fax adaptive answer operates only when +FCLASS=0.AT+FAA=1 ; Auto answer as a facsimile or a data modem depending on the callCONNECT XXXX ; DCE status response if data call+FCON ; DCE status response if fax call6.1.4  Identification of T.30 OptionsGroup 3 devices negotiate session parameters in DIS, DCS, and DTC frames. These parameters are defined in Table 6-2.
AT Command Reference Manual6-4 10486.1.5  Session Status ReportingThe DCE provides reports to the DTE on the status of a session. The DCE provides the following status reports:1. Connection and hang up status:+FCON+FHNG:<0-255>2. Requested DIS session parameters +FDIS: <string> reports remote facsimile capabilities.Syntax: +FDIS: VR, BR, WD, LN, DF, EC, BF, ST3. +FDCS: <string> reports the negotiated parameters4. Phase C prompts:XON, XOFF, DC25. Phase C base status reports: depending upon copy quality and related end-of page status:+FPTS: <1-5>6.1.6  Procedure Interrupt NegotiationCCITT allows a station to request a procedure interruption at the end of a page. This request is passed between stations bythe PIP, PIN, and PRI-Q messages.6.2  SERVICE CLASS 2 IDENTIFICATION AND SELECTIONThree commands report identification and selection information. Each of these three commands cause the DCE to send amessage to the DTE. The messages are programmable using ConfigurACE.6.2.1  +FMFR?, Request Manufacturer IdentificationThe +FMFR? command causes the DCE to send a message identifying the DCE product manufacturer. The defaultmessage is:ROCKWELLOK6.2.2  +FMDL?, Identify Product ModelThe +FMDL? command causes the DCE to send a message identifying the DCE product model. The default message issimilar to:RC96XXXACOK6.2.3  +FREV?, Identify Product RevisionThe +FREV? command causes the DCE to send a message identifying the DCE product model revision number. Themessage format is the same as the ATI3 message, e.g.:VX.XXX-model numberOK6.3  SERVICE CLASS 2 ACTION COMMANDSThese commands transfer data, and punctuate sessions. They also release specific T.30 messages. All action commandsmust be the last command on a command line as indicated by the terminating <CR>.All action commands initiate processes. The modem will not accept other commands from the DTE until the modem issues afinal result code (e.g., OK, CONNECT). The modem will abort the process if it receives any character before the final resultcode is issued.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 6-56.3.1  ATD, Originate a CallSyntax: ATD....<CR>The DCE can support a DTE command to originate a call using the ATD command (see Section 3.2).If this command is unsuccessful, the DCE reports an appropriate failure or error type result code such as NO CARRIER, NODIALTONE, or BUSY (see Section 3.3).If this call is successful, the typical DCE response is:ATDnn..nn (go off-hook, dial, get CED)+FCON (DCE detects flags)[+FCSI:<remote ID string>]+FDCS:<T.30 subparameter string>OKThe DCE dials, detects call progress, and generates the CNG tone. It then waits for a DIS frame. On detection of the firstPhase B preamble (V.21 ch. 2 modulated by 300 bps HDLC flags), it reports the “+FCON” message to the DTE. The DCEthen switches to 19200 bps.The DCE generates a DCS frame based on the received DIS frame and on the previously set +FDIS parameter. A +FDTcommand from the DTE releases the DCE to transmit that DCS frame.The DCE reports the initial received T.30 negotiation messages, including the DIS frame and the optional CSI ID string. The+FDIS: report is followed by the OK final result code.6.3.2  ATA, Answer a CallThe DCE can support a DTE command to answer an incoming call using the ATA command (see Section 3.2).The DTE may issue an Answer command in response to an incoming ring.If the Answer command is unsuccessful, the DCE will report an appropriate failure or error type result code, such as NOCARRIER (see Section 3.3).Manual Call AnswerIf this call is successful, the typical DCE response (answer and receive) is:+FCON[+FTSI:<remote ID string>]+FDCS:<T.30 subparameter string>OK(DTE should issue +FDR command here)Upon receipt of an Answer command from the DTE, the DCE answers and generates the CED tone. The DCE thengenerates a DIS frame (derived from the +FDIS parameter) and hunts for the first T.30 negotiation frames. Upon detectionof the first Phase B preamble (V.21 ch 2 modulated by 300 bps HDLC flags), it reports the “+FCON” message to the DTE.The DTE should report the initial received T.30 negotiation messages, including the DCS frame. The +FDCS: report will befollowed by the OK final result code.Automatic AnswerThe modem provides for automatic answering of incoming calls. If configured for automatic answer, the modem answers anincoming call in compliance with T.30, and reports the same messages as described for manual answer.Connection as a Data ModemIf configured to do so by the +FAA parameter, the DCE will adaptively answer as a facsimile DCE or as a data DCE. If theDCE answers as a data DCE, it resets the +FCLASS parameter to 0 and issues the appropriate final result code (e.g.,CONNECT, or NO CARRIER) to the DTE.
AT Command Reference Manual6-6 10486.3.3  +FDT, Data TransmissionSyntax: +FDT <CR>The +FDT command prefixes Phase C data transmission. When the DCE is ready to accept Phase C data, it issues thenegotiation responses and the CONNECT result code to the DTE.In Phase B, the +FDT command releases the DCE to proceed with negotiation, and releases the DCS message to theremote station. In Phase C, the +FDT command resumes transmission after the end of a prior transmit data stream.Initiate Page TransmissionPhase B DCE polled response:[+FCSI:<remote ID string>] - if new CSI received[+FDIS:<subparameters from remote station>] - if new DIS received+FDCS:<T.30 subparameter string>CONNECT<XON> - when ready for dataAfter placing a call, or after finishing a document exchange, the DTE may command the DCE to re-enter T.30 Phase B toattempt to negotiate a document transmission.Continue a PageCONNECT<XON>The DTE may issue more than one +FDT command for a given page, so that different files may be concatenated together.These files must have the same format.Phase C Data FramingPhase C data must be presented to the DCE in stream mode. The DCE expects Phase C data to follow until it detects<DLE><ETX> termination characters. The DCE will filter the stream as described in Section 6.1.2.The DCE will acknowledge the end of the data by returning the OK result code to the DTE.If there is data underrun before the next +FDT or +FET= command, the DCE will zero-fill the pad as per T.4 until the PhaseC timeout (+FPHCTO) is reached, or until more data is received. The DCE appends an RTC pattern to the transmit dataafter an +FET= command is received from the DTE.Phase C Data FormatThe Phase C data will be of the format specified by the negotiated T.30 DCS frame. The +FDCS:<string> response isdefined in Section 6.4.2. The subparameter values are described in Table 6-2.The DCE will use the negotiated minimum Scan Time parameter from the DCS frame, and insert sufficient fill bits to padeach line to the minimum scan time. This is reported in the +FDCS:ST subparameter.If the DCE finds more than one consecutive EOL in Phase C data (e.g., RTC), it will send only one EOL.1. Phase C data must conform to T.4 specifications.2. The DTE need not include a final RTC, since the DCE will append an RTC in response to an FET= command.3. Some facsimile machines may treat two EOLs as an RTC.<CAN>, Escape from TransmissionThe DCE may request the DTE to halt Phase C transmission, by sending a cancel <CAN> character (024) to the DTE. In thiscase, the DTE should terminate Phase C transmission, issue <CAN>, and wait for the OK response code from the DCE.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 6-7 Table 6-2. T.30 Session Subparameter CodesLabel Function Value DescriptionVR Vertical Resolution 0 Normal, 98 lpi1 Fine, 196 lpiBR Bit Rate (See Note 1) +FDCS (originate) +FDIS (answer)0 2400 bps/V.27 ter V.27 ter (2400 only)1 4800 bps/V.27 ter V.27 ter2 7200 bps/V.29 V.29, V.27 ter3 9600 bps /V.29 or V.17 V.29, V.27 ter4 12000 bps/V.33 or V.17 V.17, V.33, V.29, V.27 ter5 14400 bps/V.33 or V.17 V.17, V.33, V.29, V.27 terWD Page Width 0 1728 pixels in 215 mm1 2048 pixels in 255 mm2 2432 pixels in 303 mm3* 1216 pixels in 151 mm4* 864 pixels in 107 mmLN Page Length 0 A4, 297 mm1 B4, 364 mm2 unlimited lengthDF Data Compression Format 0 1-D modified Huffman1* 2-D modified Read2* 2-D uncompressed mode3* 2-D modified modified ReadEC Error Correction 0 Disable ECM(Annex A/T.30) 1* Enable ECM, 64 bytes/frame2* Enable ECM, 256 bytes/frameBF Binary File Transfer 0 Disable BFT1* Enable BFTST Scan Time/Line VR = normal VR = fine0 0 ms 0 ms1 5 ms 5 ms2 10 ms 5 ms3 10 ms 10 ms4 20 ms 10 ms5 20 ms 20 ms6 40 ms 20 ms7 40 ms 40 msNotes: 1. CCITT T.30 does not provide for the answering station to specify all speeds exactly using the DIS frame.Implementation of some BR codes (e.g., code 2) by an answering DCE is manufacturer specific.* Not supported.
AT Command Reference Manual6-8 10486.3.4  +FET, Transmit Page PunctuationSyntax: +FET=<ppm>[,<pc>,<bc>,<fc>]DCE response:+FPTS:<ppr> - when receive from remote OKThis command is used to punctuate page and document transmission after one or more +FDT commands. This commandgenerates T.30 Post Page Messages selected by the <ppm> code (Table 6-3).The +FET=<ppm> command indicates that the current page is complete; no more data will be appended to it. The valueindicates whether there are any additional pages are to be sent and, if so, whether there is a change in any of the documentparameters.The DTE can command the DCE to generate PRI-Q messages with the +FET=<ppm> command using ppm codes 4-6(Table 6-3).This command must be sent within the time out specified by +FPHCTO after sending Phase C data, or else the DCE will endthe page and document transmission. If the Phase C timeout is reached, the DCE sends an EOP post page message andterminates the session.The remote facsimile station should respond to the post page message with a post page response. The DCE will report thisusing the +FPTS:<ppr> response (Table 6-4).End a PageThe +FET= command causes the DCE to append an RTC (6 EOL) pattern as needed and enter Phase D by sending theselected T.30 Post Page message.The +FET=1 (EOM) command signals the remote station that the next document will have a new DCS negotiated; thiscauses the session to re-enter Phase B. Table 6-3. T.30 Post Page Message Codesppm Code Mnemonic Description0 [PPS-]MPS Another page next, same document1 [PPS-]EOM Another document next2 [PPS-]EOP No more pages or documents3 PPS-NULL Another partial page next4 [PPS-]PRI-MPS Another page, procedure interrupt5 [PPS-]PRI-EOM Another doc., procedure interrupt6 [PPS-]PRI-EOP All done, procedure interrupt=8+ppm Post Page Message (ppm code) Table 6-4. T.30 Post Page Response Messagesppr Code Mnemonic Description1 MCF Page good2 RTN Page bad; retrain requested3 RTP Page good; retrain requested4 PIN Page bad; interrupt requested5 PIP Page good; interrupt requested
AT Command Reference Manual1048 6-96.3.5  +FDR, Begin or Continue Phase C Receive DataSyntax: +FDR <CR>Default value: 3 seconds in some placesThe +FDR command initiates transition to Phase C data reception. This can occur after answering, dialing, a document isreceived, or a page is received.The DCE reports the negotiated T.30 parameters, with the remote ID information if available. When the DCE is ready tocommence data transfer, it issues a CONNECT response code. If the DCE cannot resume data transfer because there is nomore data, it responds OK. When the DTE is ready to accept data, it issues an <DC2> character (018) to the DCE.If the DTE issues an <XOFF> character to the DCE for flow control, the DCE signals the DTE when its buffers are empty bysending a <DLE><DC2> (<016><018>) character pair.When the DCE delivers the last byte of a page, the DCE reports the Page Transfer Status via the +FPTS:<ppr> response(Table 6-4).After a Page Transfer Status Report, the DCE reports the post page message from the remote facsimile station via the+FET:<ppm> response (Table 6-3) which signals the intentions of the remote station.The DCE holds the post page response message to the remote facsimile station (MCF, etc.), represented in the +FPTSparameter until the next +FDR command. The DTE may modify the +FPTS parameter before issuing the +FDR commandwhich releases that message. The DTE must issue a +FDR command to release Post Page Messages.Initiate Document ReceptionThe +FDR command may be issued in Phase B after an answer command, or in Phase B after a previous document.The DCE response in stream mode is:+FCFR when CFR sent[+FTSI:<remote ID string>] if new TSI received+FDCS:<T.30 subparameter string>] if new DCSCONNECT(<DC2> needed from DTE here)<Phase C data stream><DLE><ETX>+FPTS:<ppr>, <lc> [,<blc>, <cblc>]+FET:<ppm>OK(DTE must issue +FDR command to release post page response)
AT Command Reference Manual6-10 1048Continue Document ReceptionThe DTE may issue a +FDR command in Phase D, which releases the post page message, and indicates readiness toreceive another page after receipt of a Multipage (+FET:0) or PPS-NULL (+FET:3) message. The DCE response will be:CONNECT(<DC2> needed from DTE here)<Phase C data stream)<DLE><ETX>+FPTS:<ppr>, <lc> [,<blc>, <cblc>]+FET:<ppm>OK(DTE must issue +FDR command to release post page response)If done receiving:+FHNG: <hangup cause code>OKContinue page receptionPhase C Data FramingPhase C data may be presented to the DTE in stream mode. The DCE will transfer a stream of data to the DTE, followed bythe <DLE><ETX> stream termination characters. The DCE will filter the stream as described in Section 6.1.2.Phase C Data FormatThe received data format is negotiated under T.30 reported by the +FDCS:VR,BR,WD,LN,DF,EC,BF,ST response.The DCE will delete the terminating RTC (6 EOLs) patterns.<CAN>, Escape from ReceptionFrom the +FDR command until the end of Phase D Date, the DCE is in a data transfer state, and will not respond to DTEcommand characters. The DCE will respond to three ASCII control characters: <DC1> (017) and <DC3> (019) flow controlcharacters, and cancel <CAN> (024).Upon receipt of the <CAN> character, the DCE will terminate the reporting of received data by sending trailing <DLE><ETX>characters to the DTE, and will then execute an implied +FK command in order to conduct an orderly disconnection.6.3.6  +FK, Session TerminationSyntax: +FKThe +FK command causes the DCE to terminate the session in an orderly manner. In particular, the DCE will send a DCNmessage at the next opportunity and hang up. At the end of the termination process, the DCE will report the +FHNGresponse with result code (Table 6-5).This operation can be invoked by using the cancel <CAN> character during Phase C data reception (see prior section)The DCE will wait until the current page completes, unless the reception is of unlimited length; in that case, the DCE mayhalt reception and terminate the session at any time.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 6-116.3.7  +FCIG, Set Polling IDThis command allows setting the Local Polling ID string used in a CIG frame. The syntax of this command is identical to+FLID.Write syntax: +FCIG="<local ID string>"Valid value: 20-character ASCII stringDefault value: Empty6.3.8  +FLPL, Indicate a Document for PollingThis command allows setting up an answering modem to know that it has a document available for polling. This allows acalling modem to receive this fax from the answerer. The syntax is:AT+FLPL=?0,1OKAT+FLPL=1OKAT+FLPL?16.3.9  +FSPL, Enable PollingThis command allows setting up an originating modem to be able to request to receive a document from a polled station.The syntax is:AT+FSPL=?0,1OKAT+FSPL=1OKAT+FSPL?1
AT Command Reference Manual6-12 1048 Table 6-5. Hang Up Status CodesCode Cause Description0-9 Call Placement and Termination0 Normal and proper end of connection1 Ring Detect without successful handshake2 Call aborted, from +FK or AN3 No Loop Current10-19 Transmit Phase A & Miscellaneous Errors10 Unspecified Phase A error11 No Answer (T.30 T1 timeout)20-39 Transmit Phase B Hangup Codes20 Unspecified Transmit Phase B error21 Remote cannot receive or send22 COMREC error in transmit Phase B23 COMREC invalid command received24 RSPEC error25 DCS sent three times without response26 DIS/DTC received 3 times; DCS not recognized27 Failure to train at 2400 bps or +FMINSP value28 RSPREC invalid response received40-49 Transmit Phase C Hangup Codes40 Unspecified Transmit Phase C error43 DTE to DCE data underflow50-69 Transmit Phase D Hangup Codes50 Unspecified Transmit Phase D error51 RSPREC error52 No response to MPS repeated 3 times53 Invalid response to MPS54 No response to EOP repeated 3 times55 Invalid response to EOP56 No response to EOM repeated 3 times57 Invalid response to EOM58 Unable to continue after PIN or PIP70-89 Receive Phase B Hangup Codes70 Unspecified Receive Phase B error71 RSPREC error72 COMREC error73 T.30 T2 timeout, expected page not received74 T.30 T1 timeout after EOM received90-99 Receive Phase C Hangup Codes90 Unspecified Receive Phase C error91 Missing EOL after 5 seconds92 Unused code93 DCE to DTE buffer overflow94 Bad CRC or frame (ECM or BFT modes)100-119 Receive Phase D Hangup Codes100 Unspecified Receive Phase D errors101 RSPREC invalid response received102 COMREC invalid response received103 Unable to continue after PIN or PIP120-255 Reserved CodesNote: Some codes are not implemented.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 6-136.4  SERVICE CLASS 2 DCE RESPONSESThe DCE sends information responses to the DTE as a facsimile session proceeds. They indicate the state of the facsimilesession and convey needed information. These messages are solicited messages generated in execution of DTE actioncommands described in Section 6.3.The DCE precedes and follows the information responses with <CR><LF>.The DCE provides the on-line status of several session parameters when they are available during T.30 handshaking. Theseinclude the remote ID string and the DIS/DCS parameters. These responses report the T.30 session parameter frames. Thesubparameters are described in Table 6-2.6.4.1  +FCON, Facsimile Connection Response+FCON indicates connection with a fax machine. It is released by detection of HDLC flags in the first received frame.+FCON is generated in response to an Originate or Answer command.6.4.2  +FDCS:, Report Current Session CapabilitiesSyntax: +FDCS:VR,BR,WD,LN,DF,EC,BF,ST+FDCS:<string> reports the negotiated parameters. Phase C data will be formatted as described by the subparameters. Thismessage may be generated in execution of +FDT or +FDR commands before the CONNECT result code if new DCS framesare generated or received. (See Table 6-2.)6.4.3  +FDIS:, Report Remote Station CapabilitiesSyntax: +FDIS:VR,BR,WD,LN,DF,EC,BF,ST+FDIS:<string> reports remote facsimile station capabilities and intentions. The parameters are provided in ASCII notation.(See Table 6-2.)This message is generated in execution of Originate, Answer, +FDT, or +FDR commands.6.4.4  +FCFR, Indicate Confirmation to ReceiveSyntax: +FCFRThe DCE sends a +FCFR response to the DTE upon reception of an acceptable TCF training burst and a valid DCS signalfrom the remote machine. This indicates that the DCE will receive Phase C data after the remote station receives the localDCE's CFR message. The +FCFR message is generated in execution of a +FDR command.6.4.5  +FTSI:, Report the Transmit Station IDSyntax: +FTSI: “<TSI ID string>” Transmit Station IDThis response reports the received transmit station ID string, if any. This message is generated in execution of Originate,Answer, +FDT, or +FDR commands.6.4.6  +FCSI:, Report the Called Station IDSyntax: +FCSI: “<CSI ID string>” Called Station IDThis response reports the received called station ID string, if any. This message is generated in execution of Originate,Answer, +FDT, or +FDR commands.
AT Command Reference Manual6-14 10486.4.7  +FPTS:, Receive Page Transfer StatusSyntax: +FPTS:<ppr>, <lc> [,<blc>, <cblc>]The +FPTS:<ppr> is generated by the DCE at the end of Phase C data reception in execution of a +FDR command.The <ppr> is generated by the DCE; it depends on the DCE capabilities at T.4 error checking. See Table 6-4 for <ppr>values.The receiving DCE will count the lines. These values are;<lc> = line count<blc = bad line count<cblc> = <consecutive bad line countA receiving DTE may inspect <ppr> and write a modified value into the +FPTS parameter. The DCE will hold thecorresponding Post Page Response message until released by a +FDR command from the DTE.6.4.8  +FET:, Post Page Message ResponseSyntax: +FET:<ppm>The +FET:<post page message> response is generated by a receiving DCE after the end of Phase C reception on receipt ofthe post-page message from the transmitting station. The +FET:<ppm> response is generated in execution of a +FDRcommand. The <ppm> codes respond to the T.30 post page messages (Table 6-3).6.4.9  +FPTS:, Transmit Page Transfer StatusSyntax: +FPTS:<ppr>The +FPTS: response reports a <ppr> number representing the copy quality and related post-page message responsesreceived from the remote DCE. The valid <ppr> values are defined in Table 6-4.The +FPTS:<ppr> response is generated in execution of a +FET=<ppm> command.6.4.10  +FHNG:, Call Termination with StatusSyntax: +FHNG:<hangup status code>+FHNG indicates that the call has been terminated. The hangup cause is reported and stored in the +FAXERR parameterfor later inspection. The <hangup status code> values are described in Table 6-5.+FHNG:<hsc> is a possible intermediate result code to any DTE action command described in Section 6.3. It is alwaysfollowed by the OK final result code.Upon termination of a call, the DCE determines the cause of termination and reports it as part of the FHNG:<hsc> response.It also stores this <hsc> code in the +FAXERR parameter for later inspection.The hangup values are organized according to the phases of the facsimile transaction as defined by T.30. In the FigureA/T.30 flow charts, there are decision boxes labelled “Command Received?"; this is referred to as COMREC in the table.Similarly, decision boxes labelled `Response Received?' are referred to as RSPREC in the table. A COMREC error orRSPREC error indicates that one of two events occurred: 1) a DCN (disconnect) signal was received, or 2) an FCS errorwas detected and the incoming signal was still present after 3 seconds. (See Figure A/T.30).The table values are in decimal notation. Leading zero characters are optional.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 6-156.4.11  +FCIG:, Report the Polled Station IDSyntax: +FCIG: “<        ID string>” Polled Station IDThis response reports the received transmit station ID string, if any. This message is generated in execution of Originate,Answer, +FDT, or +FDR commands.6.4.12  +FDTC:, Report the Polled Station CapabilitiesSyntax: +FDTC: “<     string>” Polled Station CapabilitiesIf the answerer has a document to poll, it would be communicated to the originator in bit 9 of the DIS frame. The originatingstation may elect to transmit a fax, and later, send SIG and DTC frames to pick up the polled document. The answeringstation would report the incoming DTC frame via the +FDTC: response message after command mode is cancelled with theAT+FDR command.6.4.13  +FPOLL, Indicate Polling RequestSyntax: +FPOLL:This message is sent to the DTE if the received DIS message indicates that the remote station has a document to poll (by bit9 in the DIS) and polling has been enabled with the AT+FSPL command. The DTE may then decide to receive rather thantransmit.
AT Command Reference Manual6-16 10486.5  SERVICE CLASS 2 PARAMETERSAll Service Class 2 parameters can be read, written, and tested for range of legal values by the DCE. The general syntax isdescribed in Section 6.1.Group 3 FAX devices negotiate session parameters in DIS, DCS, and DTC frames. The following parameters are provided tocondition the facsimile DCE for the capabilities it will offer and to report the session settings negotiated.The three primary T.30 session parameters are +FDCC, +FDIS and +FDCS. They are compound parameters, using valueslisted in Table 6-2 . Figure 6-1 illustrates their relationships. Figure 6-1. T.30 Session Parameter Relationships6.5.1  +FDCC, DCE Capabilities ParametersWrite syntax: +FDCC=VR,BR,WD,LN,DF,ED,BF,STValid values: See Table 6-2Default values: 0,3,0,2,0,0,0,0 (9600 bps fax models) or 0,5,0,2,0,0,0,0 (14400 bps fax models)+FDCC allows the DTE to sense and constrain the capabilities of the facsimile DCE from the choices defined in CCITT T.30Table 2. When +FDCC is modified by the DTE, the DCE copies +FDCC into +FDIS.6.5.2  +FDIS, Current Sessions Capabilities ParametersWrite syntax: +FDIS=VR,BR,WD,LN,DF,EC,BF,STValid values: See Table 6-2Default values: 0,3,0,2,0,0,0,0 (9600 bps fax models) or 0,5,0,2,0,0,0,0 (14400 bps fax models)The +FDIS parameter allows the DTE to sense and constrain the capabilities used for the current session. The DCE uses+FDIS to generate DIS or DTC messages directly, and uses +FDIS and received DIS messages to generate DCSmessages.The DCE initializes the +FDIS parameter from the +FDCC parameter on initialization, when +FDCC is written, and at the endof a session.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 6-176.5.3  +FDCS, Current Session Results ParametersRead syntax: +FDCS?DCE response: +FDCS=VR,BR,WD,LN,DF,EC,BF,STor +FDCS=Valid values: See Table 6-2Default values: 0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0The +FDCS parameter is loaded with the negotiated T.30 parameters for the current session. A transmitting DCE generatesDCS; a receiving DCE gets DCS from the remote station. The DTE may read this parameter.The +FDCS parameter is initialized 0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0 upon initialization and at the beginning of a session. If the DTE issues a+FDCS? command in the initial state, the DCE reports:<CR><LF>0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0<CR><LF>The contents of +FDCS are spontaneously reported during execution of +FDR or +FDT commands by the+FDCS:VR,BR,WD,LN,BF,EC,BF,ST response using the same compound parameter format.Several commands and responses reference T.30 session negotiated parameters. These are described by a set of commonsubparameters. These subparameters are described in Table 6-2 with notes. Optional parameter values are marked with an*. Unspecified parameter values are reserved for future use.The +FDCC, +FDIS, and +FDCS compound parameters use these session parameters (On writes, unspecifiedsubparameters are unchanged.)The +FDIS:, +FDCS:, and +FDTC: session report responses use these subparameters.For test response, ranges of values are reported for each subparameter enclosed in parentheses characters. For example, aDCE response to +FDCC=? could report:<CRLF> (0,1), (0-5), (0-3), (0-2), (0-2), (0-2), (0), (0-7) <CRLF>  (14400 fax models)Example:+FDIS=0,5,0,2,0,0,0,1 =VR = 0 98 dpi vertical resolution,BR = 5 14400 bit/sWD = 0 1728 pixels,LN = 2 unlimited lengthDF = 0 1-D modified Huffman coding,EC = 0 no ECM,BF = 0 no BFT,ST = 1 5 ms scan time.
AT Command Reference Manual6-18 10486.5.4  +FLID=, Local ID StringWrite syntax: +FLID="<local ID string>"Valid value: 20-character ASCII stringDefault value: EmptyIf FLID is not a null string, it generates a TSI or CSI frame. Table 3/T.30 includes digits 0-9, “+” and space.If the DCE supports use of Table 3/T.30 only, the response to a +FLID=? command is “(20) (32, 43, 48-57).” If the DCEsupports printable ASCII <, the response is: “(20) (32-127)<CRLF>.” The first “(20)” represents string length: the second(character values) field reports supported string values.1.  The string is saved in RAM.2.  Non-numeric characters are not filtered out.3.  The string is right justified.6.5.5  +FCR, Capability to ReceiveWrite syntax: +FCR=<value>Valid values: 0 or 1Default value: 0+FCR=0 indicates that the DCE will not receive message data. This can be used when the DTE has insufficient storage. TheDCE can send and can be polled for a file.+FCR is sampled in CCITT T.30 Phase A and Phase D.6.5.6  +FPTS=, Page Transfer StatusWrite Syntax: +FPTS=<ppr>Valid values: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5Default value: 0The +FPTS parameter contains a value representing the post page response, including copy quality and related end-of-pagestatus. These values correspond to post page response messages defined in T.30. The receiving DCE sets this parameterafter it receives a page of Phase C data. The transmitting DCE sets this parameter with the status reported by the receivingstation. The DTE may inspect or modify this parameter.The set of <ppr> values is defined in Table 6-4. These values are also reported in the +FPTS response to the +FDRcommand.6.5.7  +FCQ, Copy Quality CheckingWrite syntax: +FCQ=<value>Valid values: 0Default value: 0This parameter controls Copy Quality checking by a receiving facsimile DCE.The DCE returns +FCQ=0 which indicates the DCE does no quality checking. The DCE will generate Copy Quality OK(MCF) responses to complete pages, and set +FPTS=1.6.5.8  +FPHCTO, DTE Phase C Response Time-outWrite syntax: +FPHCTO=<value>Valid values: 0 - 255, 100 millisecond units.Default value: 30
AT Command Reference Manual1048 6-19The +FPHCTO command determines how long the DCE will wait for a command after reaching the end of data whentransmitting in Phase C. When this time-out is reached, the DCE assumes there are no more pages and no documents tosend. It then sends the T.30 EOP response to the remote device.6.5.9  +FAXERR, T.30 Session Error ReportRead syntax: +FAXERR= <table value>, read onlyValid values: 0 - 255, see Table 6-5 for meaningThis read-only parameter indicates the cause of the hangup. Table 6-5 shows the valid values for this parameter as well asthe meaning of the each value. +FAXERR is set by the DCE at the conclusion of a fax session. The DCE resets +FAXERRto 0 at the beginning of Phase A off-hook time.6.5.10  +FBOR, Data Bit OrderWrite syntax: +FBOR=<value>Valid values: 0, 1, 2, or 3Default value: 0This parameter controls the mapping between PSTN facsimile data and the DTE-DCE link. There are two choices:Direct: The first bit transferred to each byte on the DTE-DCE link is the first bit transferred on the PSTN data carrier.Reversed: The last bit transferred of each byte on the DTE-DCE link is the first bit transferred on the PSTN data carrier.There are two data types to control:This command controls Phase C data (T.4 encoded data) transferred during execution of +FDT or +FDR commands.The following two codes are supported:+FBOR=0 or 2 Selects direct bit order for Phase C data.+FBOR=1 or 3 Selects reversed bit order for Phase C data.Note that this parameter does not affect the bit order of control characters generated by the DCE.6.5.11  +FAA, Answer ParameterWrite syntax: +FAA=<value>Valid values: 0 or 1Default value: 0+FAA=0 Constrains the DCE to answer as set by +FCLASS.+FAA=1 Indicates that the DCE can answer and automatically determine whether to answer as a Class 2facsimile DCE or as a data modem. If the DCE automatically switches, it modifies FCLASSappropriately.Fax adaptive answer operates only when +FCLASS=0.Class 2 adaptive answer is implemented as follows:First, a data mode handshake is attempted. If the DCE has been configured for automode detection (using the +MScommand), the DCE may try several protocols before terminating attempts to make a data mode connection. This can takeas long as 6-8 seconds.If the data mode connection attempt fails, a facsimile Class 2 connection is assumed. When a connection is made as aresult of the adaptive answer, the DCE issues the DATA or FAX result code before the CONNECT or +FCON message toinform the DTE of the connection type. After making a Class 2 connection, the DCE stays on-line rather than going into thecommand mode as with a Class 1 connection.
AT Command Reference Manual6-20 10486.5.12  +FBUF?, Buffer SizeRead syntax: +FBUF?DCE response syntax: <bs>, <xoft>, <xont>, <bc>where:<bs> = total buffer size<xoft> = XOFF threshold<xcont> = XON threshold<bc> = current buffer byte countExample:+FBUF?512, 506, 500, 0The +FBUF parameter allows the DTE to determine the characteristics of the DCE's data buffer. Data buffers are used forflow control. Use of the reported values allow the DTE to transfer data without provoking XOFF.6.6 EXAMPLE SESSIONSTables 6-6 and 6-7 show the typical command and responses for sending and receiving two pages, respectively.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 6-21 Table 6-6. Send Two Pages, 1-D, No ErrorsDTE Command DCE Response Local DTE Action Remote Station ActionAT+CLASS=2 OK Set Class 2 xAT+FLID="<local ID>" OK Set local IDAT<dial string>+FCON[+FCSI:"<csi>"]+FDIS: <dis codes>OKOff hook, dialSend CNGDetect flags[Get CSI]Get DISAnswer,Send [CED]V.21 flags[CSI]DISAT+FDT<1st page data><DLE><ETX>+FDCS:<DCS codes>CONNECT<XON>OK[Send TSI]Send DCSSend TCFGet CFRSend carrierSend page data[Get TSI]Get DCSGet TCFSend CFRReceive carrierReceive page dataAT+FET=0+FPTS:1OKSend RTCGet MPSGet MCFGet RTCGet MPSSend MCFAT+FDT<2nd page data><DLE><ETX>CONNECT<XON>OKSend carrierSend page dataReceive carrierReceive page dataAT+FET=2+FPTS:1+FHNG:0OKSend RTCSend EOPGet MCFSend DCNHang upGet RTCGet EOPSend MCFGet DCNHang up
AT Command Reference Manual6-22 1048 Table 6-7. Receive Two Pages, 1-D Data, No ErrorsDTE Command DCE Response Local DTE Action Remote Station ActionAT+FCR=1 OK Enable receptionAT+FLID="<local ID>" OK Set local ID RING Detect ring Dials[, Send CNG]ATA+FCON[+FTSI:"<tsi>"]+FDCS:<dcs codes>OKOff hookSend CEDSend CSISend DISDetect flags[Get TSI]Get DCSBegin TCF receiveGet CEDGet CSIGet DISSend V.21 flags[Send TSI]Send DCSStart TCFAT+FDR<DC2>+FCFR[+FDCS:"<dcs codes>]CONNECT<page data stream><DLE><ETX>+FPTS:1, <lc>+FET:0OKAccept TCFSend CFRGet page carrierGet page dataDetect RTCGet MPSFinish TCFGet CFRSend pager carrierSend page dataSend RTCDrop carrierSend MPSAT+FDR<DC2>CONNECT<page data stream><DLE><ETX>+FPTS:1, <lc>+FET:2OKSend MCFGet page carrierGet page dataDetect RTCGet EOPGet MCFSend page carrierSend page dataSend RTCDrop carrierSend EOPAT+FDR+FHNG:0OKSend MCFGet DCNGet MCFSend DCN
AT Command Reference Manual1048 7-17. VOICE/AUDIO COMMANDSThe modem is configured into Voice Mode (modem models not supporting business audio) or Voice/Audio Mode (modemmodels supporting business audio) in response to the AT #CLS=8 command, and this mode is composed of the Voice andAudio sub-configurations as described in this section. Additional voice/audio AT commands are available to support selectionof operational parameters from both inside and outside the Voice/Audio Mode.a) Voice Sub-Configuration. Enhanced Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation (ADPCM) coding and decoding ofanalog voice is accomplished with a 7.2 kHz sampling rate and 2 or 4 bits/sample quantization, and supports efficientcompression and decompression of digitized voice. Additionally, the Voice Configuration supports concurrent tonegeneration/detection capabilities.b) Audio Sub-Configuration (Available Only for Modem Models Supporting Business Audio). Linear PCM codingand decoding of analog audio is accomplished with 7.2 kHz or 11.025 kHz sampling rates and 8 bits/samplequantization, and supports superior sound quality as compared to ADPCM. With a sampling rate of 7.2 kHz, the AudioSub-configuration supports concurrent tone generation/detection capabilities. With a sampling rate of 7.2 kHz or 11.025kHz, this sub-configuration can be used to record and playback monophonic data in 8-bit unsigned linear PCM format.Note: The term "voice" is used to refer to both voice and audio functions, except where otherwise noted.The Voice/Audio Mode (i.e., either sub-configuration) supports three submodes once a voice connection has beenestablished (refer to the descriptions of the #CLS command): Online Voice Command Mode, Voice Receive Mode, andVoice Transmit Mode. Determination of whether operation takes place in the Voice sub-configuration or the Audio sub-configuration is made by use of the #VBS and #VSR commands (refer to the descriptions of these commands).7.1 VOICE/AUDIO SUBMODES7.1.1  Online Voice Command ModeOnline Voice Command Mode is the default Voice submode entered when the #CLS=8 command is issued, and may also beentered from Voice Receive Mode or Voice Transmit Mode. Entry into Online Voice Command Mode is indicated to the DTEvia the VCON message, after which AT commands can be entered without aborting the telephone line connection.If the modem is the answerer, it enters Online Voice Command Mode immediately after going off-hook, and can reportinstances of DTMF tones and calling tones to the DTE. If the modem is the originator, it enters Online Voice CommandMode based on detection of the ringback cadence going away, upon expiration of the ringback never came timer, or upondetection of answer tone, and the modem can report DTMF tones, answer tones, busy tone, and dial tone to the DTE. (Notethat DTMF tone reporting is supported in this mode if DTMF reporting is enabled via the #VTD command.)When this mode is entered as a result of going off-hook with the D or A command, VCON is always sent to the DTE, afterwhich the modem accepts commands. If this mode is entered from Voice Transmit Mode, the DTE has issued the<DLE><ETX>, and the modem responds with VCON. If this mode is entered from the Voice Receive Mode because of a keyabort, the modem issues the <DLE><ETX> followed by VCON.If the #VLS command has switched in a handset or other device in place of the telephone line, Online Voice Command Modeis immediately entered, whereas if the telephone line is selected, a physical connection with another station must occurbefore entering this mode.7.1.2  Voice Receive ModeVoice Receive Mode is entered when the DTE issues the #VRX command in order to receive voice data. This typicallyoccurs when either recording a greeting message, or when recording voice messages from a remote station.In Voice Receive Mode, voice samples from the modem analog-to-digital converter (ADC) are sent either to the ADPCMcodec for compression, or to the PCM coder for linear PCM coding, and can then be read by the host. AT commands controlthe voice sampling rate as well as codec bits-per-sample rates, and can also be used to select adjustment of the silencedetection period and sensitivity level when ADPCM compression is selected.
AT Command Reference Manual7-2 1048In this mode, and when the sampling rate is 7.2 kHz, the modem detects and reports DTMF, dial tone, and busy tonecadence as enabled by the #VTD command. Additionally, the modem detects and reports inactivity (periods of silence) asenabled by the #VSS command. The modem can exit the Voice Receive Mode only via a DTE Key Abort, or via DisconnectInactivity timer (S30) expiration.7.1.3  Voice Transmit ModeVoice Transmit Mode is entered when the DTE issues the #VTX command in order to transmit voice data. In this mode,when the sampling rate is 7.2 kHz, the modem continues to detect and report DTMF and calling tones if enabled by the#VTD command. This mode is typically used when playing back greeting messages or previously received/recordedmessages.In this mode:1.  If the Voice Sub-configuration is in operation, voice decompression is provided by the ADPCM codec, and thedecompressed ADPCM voice data is then reconstituted into analog voice by the DAC at the original compressionquantization sample-per-bits rate.2.  If the Audio Sub-configuration is in operation, PCM decoding is provided by the linear PCM decoder, and the decodedaudio data is then reconstituted into analog voice by the DAC at the original 1 sample/8 bits rate.7.2 VOICE/AUDIO CAPABILITIES7.2.1  Call Establishment - OriginateDirected Originate (Dial as a specific modem type)For most call originations, it is known ahead of time what type of call is being attempted, and it is acceptable to disconnect ifthe remote side of the connection does not cooperate. In this case, the modem can be configured ahead of time with theexisting +FCLASS (and +FAE=0 or +FAA=0) or the #CLS command to be a data, fax, or voice/audio modem. For Data andFax Modes, the modem subsequently either succeeds with the desired type of connection, or eventually hangs up. For theVoice/Audio Mode, the DTE has the option of hanging up if there are indications that the remote station has not answered invoice, thus implementing a directed originate for voice. The following are the three connection type choices:Voice/AudioThe modem dials and reports call progress to the DTE, which reduces to reporting “NO DIALTONE", "BUSY”, or "NOANSWER".The modem allows the DTE to program a time period, which if elapsed after any ringback is detected, forces the modem toassume the remote has gone off-hook. A secondary time period (safety valve) can define a maximum elapsed time afterdialing for receiving no ringback before the modem assumes that the remote has gone off-hook. This safety valve is devisedin case the remote picks up the telephone before any ringback is generated, and no other tones are detected. In this mode,the modem is attempting to make a voice connection only and therefore, while waiting for ringback to disappear, it is alsofeasible to disconnect upon detection something which is definitely not voice from the remote, such as any answer tone. Themodem provides detection of “ringback went away or never came”.FaxThe modem dials and reports call progress to the DTE as in all modes. A Fax Class 1 or Fax Class 2 handshake is pursuedaccording to the current configuration.DataThe modem dials and reports call progress to the DTE as in all modes. A data handshake is pursued according to thecurrent configuration.Adaptive Originate (Dial with Voice/Data/Fax Discrimination)The DTE may wish to originate a call which adapts to the remote answerer. For instance, the user may wish to send a voicemessage if a human picks up the telephone, but a facsimile if a fax machine answers. The modem can facilitate this type ofadaptive originate by extending what it does for the directed originate modes. After determining that the remote station haspicked up the line, the modem goes back to Online Voice Command Mode, thus terminating the “connecting state.” Once inthis mode, the modem reports what it receives from the answerer via specific result codes to the DTE. The DTE can thenhave the option of pursuing a data, fax, or voice/audio connection.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 7-37.2.2  Call Establishment - AnswerDirected Answer (Answer as a specific modem type)If the DTE wants to be only one kind of answerer (i.e., voice/audio, fax, or data), it can configure the modem to answerexclusively in the chosen mode.Voice/AudioThe modem is configured to answer in Voice/Audio Mode only and assumes the caller will cooperate. After going off-hook,the voice VCON is issued, no answer tone is generated, and the modem is immediately placed in Online Voice CommandMode. The DTE typically responds by sending a greeting message of some type, and DTMF tone recognition/reporting canbe enabled. Eventually, an incoming voice message can be recorded by the host. (Unpredictable results occur if the caller isnot prepared for a voice call.)FaxThe modem is configured to answer in Fax Class 1 or Fax Class 2 Mode only, and it assumes the caller is going tocooperate. This configuration has the effect of disabling Voice/Audio Mode, forcing +FCLASS to either 1 or 2, and forcingboth +FAA and +FAE to 0.DataThe modem is configured to answer in Data Mode only and assumes the caller is going to cooperate. This configuration hasthe effect of disabling Voice/Audio Mode, forcing +FCLASS = 0, and forcing both +FAA and +FAE to 0.Adaptive Answer (Answer with Voice/Data/Fax Discrimination)In normal operation, it is desirable for a modem supporting fax and voice to provide the ability to discriminate between thetwo when answering unsolicited or unattended calls. (It is most often the case that a fax is received or a voice messagerecorded when nobody is present.)Data/Fax DiscriminationIf the DTE wishes to allow for a data or fax call, the +FCLASS and +FAA or +FAE commands can be configured for adaptiveanswer between data and Class 1 or Class 2 fax.Voice/Fax DiscriminationThis is the most important discrimination capability needed from the user's standpoint. The modem must be configured forVoice/Audio (#CLS=8), causing the modem to enter Online Voice Command Mode immediately upon going off-hook. InVoice/Audio Mode, the DTE automatically receives indications of DTMF tones and Calling Tones. The DTE can now switchto Voice Transmit Mode in order to play a greeting message, perhaps one which instructs the caller how to enter specificDTMF sequences to switch modes. The DTE can then react to the response, or the lack thereof, to such a message. Themodem supports switching to Class 1 or Class 2 answer mode by virtue of the #CLS=1 or #CLS=2 command, and if such aswitch is made and fails, the modem reports the failure but does not hang up, allowing the DTE further experimentation time.If the user wishes to switch to Class 1 or Class 2, but also wants the DTE to indeed hang up the line if the fax fails, the+FCLASS command should be used instead of the #CLS command. The only difference between these commands is thatissuing +FCLASS cancels the modem's memory of voice, whereas #CLS causes the modem to remain off-hook, even if afax or data handshake fails, until it receives an H command.Voice/Data/Fax DiscriminationThe DTE can try data modem operation after an answer by changing the #CLS setting to 0. A data handshake attempt canbe added based upon DTMF responses or lack thereof.
AT Command Reference Manual7-4 10487.2.3  Voice/Audio Data TransferA significant area of concern when handling the transfer of voice/audio data is the data transfer rate on the modem/DTEinterface. Data transfer rates can be expressed as the number of interrupts which must be serviced per time period to keepup. This is a function of the sampling rate and compression method (if any) used by the modem, and the DTE interfacespeed required to handle the data flow on the telephone line side.Tables 7-1a and 7-1b demonstrate the relationship between the sampling rate, interrupt rate, and DTE speed necessary forthe modem to support various compression ratios. The built-in 16C550A UART-compatible interface in the MCU hardware isrequired to support Voice/Audio Mode operation in the Microsoft Windows environment. Table 7-1. DTE Speedsa. 7.2 kHz Sample RateModem Samples per 8-bit Byte Required Asynchronous DTE Speed(8N1 Format)Implied DTE Speed Supported1 (8-bits) 72,000 bps 115.2 kbps2 (4-bits) 36,000 bps 38.4 kbps4 (2-bits) 18,000 bps 19.2 kbpsb. 11.025 kHz Sample RateModem Samples per 8-bit Byte Required Asynchronous DTE Speed(8N1 Format)Implied DTE Speed Supported1 (8-bits) 110,250 bps 115.2 kbps7.2.4  Tone and Status Monitoring  Shielded <DLE> StatusesThe modem can detect specific tones and other status information, and report these to the DTE while in any of the threevoice submodes. The modem simultaneously looks for 1300 and 1100 Hz calling tones when answering, and for CCITT andBell answer tones when originating. The modem can also detect dial or busy tones in any of the three voice submodes. Alldetected tones, as well as certain other statuses addressed in Table 7-2 such as silence and “telset off-hook” (i.e., handsetoff-hook) are reported as shielded codes.When in Online Voice Command Mode or Voice Transmit Mode, the codes in Table 7-2 are sent to the DTE immediatelyupon verification by the modem of the associated tone, status, or cadence. In this mode, the 2-character code is notbuffered, nor does the DTE have the ability to stop the code with flow control. If the DTE has started (but not completed)sending any AT command, the Tone Monitoring function is disabled until the command has been received and processed.The modem can discriminate between single and multiple DTMF tones received. If calling tone, dial tone, busy tone, oranswer tone is detected, this detection is reported repeatedly (at reasonable intervals) if the DTE takes no action, and thetone continues to be detected.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 7-5 Table 7-2. Codes Sent to the DTECode Sent to DTE Meaning<DLE>0 –<DLE>9, <DLE>*,<DLE>#, <DLE>A–<DLE>DDTMF. Digits 0 through 9, *, #, or A through D detected by the modem, i.e., user has pressed a keyon a local or remote telephone. The modem sends only one <DLE> code per DTMF button pushed.<DLE>a Answer Tone (CCITT). Send to the DTE when the V.25/T.30 2100 Hz Answer Tone (Data or Fax) isdetected. If the DTE fails to react to the code, and the modem continues to detect Answer tone, thecode is repeated as often as once every half second.<DLE>b Busy. Sent in Voice Receive Mode when the busy cadence is detected, after any remaining data inthe voice receive buffer. The modem sends the busy <DLE>b code every 4 seconds if busycontinues to be detected and the DTE does not react. This allows the DTE the flexibility of ignoringwhat could be a false busy detection.<DLE>c Calling Tone. Sent when the T.30 1100 Hz Calling Tone (Fax Modem) is detected in any of the voiceoperating modes. The modem assumes that the calling tone is valid and sends this code only after 4seconds of proper cadence has been detected. If the DTE does not react to the <DLE>c, and callingtone continues, the code is sent again as often as once every 4 seconds.<DLE>d Dialtone. Sent in Voice Receive Mode when dial tone is detected after any remaining data in thevoice receive buffer. The modem sends the <DLE>d code every 3 seconds if dial tone continues tobe detected and the DTE does not react. This allows the DTE the flexibility of ignoring what could bea false dial tone detection.<DLE>e European Data Modem Calling Tone. Sent when the V.25 1300 Hz Calling Tone (Data Modem) isdetected in a voice submode. The modem assumes that the calling tone is valid, and sends this codeonly after 4 seconds of proper cadence has been detected. If the DTE does not react to the <DLE>eand calling tone continues, the code is sent again as often as once every 4 seconds.<DLE>f Bell Answer Tone. Sent when Bell 2225 Hz Answer Tone (Data) is detected. If the DTE fails to reactto the code and the modem continues to detect Answer tone, the code is repeated as often as every1/2 second.<DLE>h Hung Up Handset. Sent immediately when the modem detects that the local handset has hung-up(i.e., has transitioned from off-hook to on-hook) while in any of the three voice submodes.<DLE>o Overrun. Sent in Voice Receive Mode if the voice receive data buffer overflows, in which case, thelatest data is lost in favor of retaining the oldest data in the buffer. (The DTE may not have beenreading data from the modem lately.) The modem inserts the <DLE>o at the end of the buffer, thusmarking the location where data was lost by the DTE. The modem does not append <DLE>o codesto the buffer contiguously. If more than one data byte is lost before the DTE begins reading again,there is only on <DLE>o code in the data stream. However, if the DTE resumes reading, and thenonce again allows the buffer to overflow, a new <DLE>o is appended to the data by the modem.Thus, the <DLE>o does not indicate how many bytes of contiguous data has been lost, but mayreport multiple gaps of lost data in the data stream.<DLE>q Quiet. Sent in Voice Receive Mode following any remaining data in the receive voice buffer when thesilence detection timer (#VSP) expires and there has been voice data passed to the DTE. Note thatwith #VSS=0, the Quiet message never occurs. In general, <DLE>q is sent if first there was sound,and now there is no sound, and means that somebody has stopped talking, and according to thecriteria selected in the #VSP and #VSS settings, is probably not going to start again. If the DTEignores the <DLE>q code, the modem automatically resets its timer and sends the code again if the#VSP time period again expires. This allows the DTE time to react to what may be a false silencedetection.
AT Command Reference Manual7-6 1048 Table 7-2. Shielded Codes Sent to the DTE (Cont’d)Code Sent to DTE Meaning<DLE>s Silence. Sent in Voice Receive Mode after the silence detection timer (#VSP) expires and if validvoice has not been detected (#VSS). In general, <DLE>s is sent if no sound was detected at all. Thisdiffers slightly from Quiet (<DLE>q) in that it can be used by the DTE in its discrimination algorithmsas a means of determining if anything at all is coming from the remote station. If the DTE ignores the<DLE>s code, the modem automatically resets its timer and sends the code again if the #VSP timeperiod again expires. This allows the DTE time to react to what may be a false detection of silence.<DLE>t Handset Off-Hook. Sent one time when the local handset transition from on-hook to off-hook isdetected in any of the three voice submodes.<DLE>u Underrun. Sent in Voice Transmit Mode when the voice transmit buffer becomes empty withoutreceiving a <DLE><ETX> or <DLE><CAN> command first. The modem remains in transmit mode,but issues the <DLE>u to indicate that silence is being generated. When the DTE resumes sendingbytes, the modem allows a small number of bytes to build up in the buffer before re-enabling thetransmitter to avoid repeated underruns. However, with the underrun condition, the modem does notwait for the XOFF threshold (or timer) to be met before resuming, as it does on an initial transmit orresume operation because the remote listener may be unaware of the underrun, and keeping thesilence short may serve to mask the underrun altogether.<DLE>T Timing Mark. Sent in Voice Receive Mode, and placed in the data stream at 1 second intervals,when enabled by #VTM = 10.<DLE><ETX> End of Stream. <DLE><ETX> is sent to denote the end of a voice data stream, similar to fax Class 1and 2. This occurs in Voice Receive Mode only after the DTE issues the key abort.7.2.5  Shielded <DLE> Commands from the DTEMost commands issued for voice are implemented as extensions to the AT command set, and are accepted only if themodem is in a valid command mode, such as Online Voice Command Mode. However, there are some operations which areavailable to the DTE without necessitating a switch to Online Voice Command Mode. The most obvious of these is the<DLE><ETX> which the DTE issues during Voice Transmit Mode to terminate an output message. Table 7-3 lists shielded<DLE> commands recognized by the modem.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 7-7 Table 7-3. Shielded DTE CodesCode Sent toModemMeaning<DLE>p Pause. Sent during Voice Transmit Mode to force the modem to suspend sending voice data to theselected output device(s). Any data currently in the voice transmit buffer is saved until either aresume (<DLE>r), or cancel <DLE><CAN>, is received, in which case the data is lost. If a<DLE><ETX> is received during the paused state, the modem processes it normally, and alsoautomatically resumes transmission of the data left in the buffer (appended with <DLE><ETX>). Anyother data received from the DTE while in this paused state is placed in the transmit buffer accordingto available space, with flow control active. (This command is ignored in other voice submodes.)<DLE>r Resume. Sent during Voice Transmit Mode to force the modem to resume sending voice data to theselected output device(s). Any data currently in the voice transmit buffer is now played. (Thiscommand is ignored in other voice modes.) The pause and resume commands are different than asimple suspension of data; data in the buffer is “frozen” and not played when the DTE pauses.<DLE>E Purge DCE Buffer. Sent during the transmission or reception of voice/audio data, by embedding thecommand in the voice data stream, to purge the corresponding DCE buffer. (See the <DLE><EOT>code.)<DLE>u Increment Playback Volume. Sent during audio mode to increment the playback volume. The<DLE>u action command allows the application to increase the playback volume of the headphoneand speaker outputs during playback while in the data state. Each <DLE>u will increment thetransmit level by 1 unit. Adjustment by a value greater than 1 may be achieved by transmitting astring of <DLE>u codes. For example, a string consisting of "<DLE>u <DLE>u <DLE>u <DLE>u<DLE>u" increases the playback volume by a value of 5 units. The <DLE>u code can be used toadjust the volume within the range of 128-228. (See <DLE><u> and <DLE><d> in Section 7.3.2.)<DLE>d Decrement Playback Volume. Sent during audio mode to decrement the playback volume. The<DLE>d action command allows the application to decrease the playback volume of the headphoneand speaker outputs during playback while in the data state. Each <DLE>d will decrement thetransmit level by 1 unit. Adjustment by a value greater than 1 may be achieved by transmitting astring of <DLE>d codes. For example, a string consisting of "<DLE>d <DLE>d <DLE>d <DLE>d<DLE>d" decreases the playback volume by a value of 5 units. The <DLE>d code can be used toadjust the volume within the range of 128-228. (See <DLE><u> and <DLE><d> in Section 7.3.2.)<DLE><CAN> Cancel. Sent during Voice Transmit Mode to indicate that the DTE has finished transmitting a voicemessage and wants the modem to discard any remaining data in the voice transmit buffer. Themodem immediately purges its buffer, and then responds with the VCON message entering OnlineVoice Command Mode. (This command is ignored by the modem when not in Voice Transmit Mode.)<DLE><EOT> Voice Bytes Buffered Query. Sent during the transmission or reception of voice/audio data, byembedding the command in the voice data stream, to learn the number of corresponding bytesbuffered by the DCE at the moment the <DLE><EOT> command is received by the DCE.<DLE>XZBBC=n<DLE> is returned by the DCE, in which "n" represents the number of bytes bufferedas a two byte hexadecimal value.<DLE><ETX> Terminate. Sent during Voice Transmit Mode to indicate that the DTE has finished transmitting avoice message. The modem completes transmission of any remaining data in the voice transmitbuffer before responding with the VCON message and entering Online Voice Command Mode. (Thiscommand is ignored by the modem when not in Voice Transmit Mode.)
AT Command Reference Manual7-8 10487.2.6 Voice RecordTo effect recording of a message received via a handset or microphone, the DTE must configure the modem for Voice Mode(#CLS=8), and select the proper relay setup (#VLS) to instruct the modem whether to use the auxiliary device. The modemresponds to the #VLS command by issuing a relay activate command to select the input device. When a device other thanthe telephone line is selected, the modem immediately enters Online Voice Command Mode (indicated by VCON). DTMFdetection is therefore enabled as soon as the DTE selects the device, such as a handset, although the user still needs tophysically pick up the telephone and “press buttons.” Even if the DTE has not entered Voice Receive or Transmit Modes(#VTX or #VRX), these DTMF tones are delivered via shielded codes identically to when a physical telephone connectionexists but the DTE has not yet commanded receive or transmit.When the DTE decides to record the message, it issues the #VRX command and upon command receipt, the modemimmediately switches to Voice Receive Mode. Since the microphone or handset is switched in, the modem immediatelyissues the CONNECT message indicating that the modem has switched to Voice Receive Mode and is beginning thetransfer of ADPCM voice or PCM audio data as well as shielded DTMF tones, and other tones and statuses.In this recording state, the modem (if so configured) monitors for line silence. If the #VSP period expires, the modem sendsthe <DLE>q or <DLE>s code to the DTE.Recording can be canceled only via two events:1.  The DTE sends any character to the modem. This is the key abort, and is the normal method of terminating the receivemode.2.  The S30 Disconnect Inactivity timer expires, which is generally an undesired event.7.2.7 Voice PlaybackTo effect playback of a message recorded via a handset or microphone, or of a message recorded during a voice call, theDTE must configure the modem for Voice Mode (#CLS=8) and select the proper relay setup (#VLS) to instruct the modemwhether to use the handset or speaker. The modem responds to the #VLS command by issuing a relay activate command toselect the input device. The hardware must provide a means of selecting a handset and/or microphone instead of thetelephone line, as this input device. When a device other that the telephone line is selected, the modem immediately entersOnline Voice Command Mode (indicated by VCON). DTMF detection is thus enabled as soon as the DTE selects the device,such as a handset, although the user still needs to physically pick up the telephone before he can issue DTMF tones. Onceselected, however, the user can indeed pick up the telephone and “press buttons.” Even if the DTE has not entered VoiceReceive or Transmit Modes (#VTX or #VRX), these DTMF tones are delivered via shielded codes, identically to when aphysical telephone connection exists but the DTE has not yet commanded receive nor transmit.When the DTE decides to play the message, it issues the #VTX command, and the modem immediately switches to VoiceTransmit Mode. Since the speaker or handset is already switched in, the modem immediately issues the CONNECTmessage indicating that the modem is in Voice Transmit Mode and is expecting voice data from the DTE.A subsequent <DLE><ETX> has to be issued to switch back to Online Voice Command Mode.Volume Adjustment During RecordThe record volume is adjusted automatically by an automatic gain control (AGC) circuit (for V.34 and ACF/SP products).Volume Adjustment During PlaybackThe playback volume of the headphone and speaker outputs and handset can be adjusted by the #TL command (Section7.3.2).
AT Command Reference Manual1048 7-97.2.8  Voice Call TerminationLocal DisconnectThe DTE can disconnect from a telephone call by commanding a mode change to Online Voice Command Mode (if notalready in it), and by issuing the H command.Remote Disconnect DetectionWhen in Voice Receive Mode, the modem sends the proper shielded <DLE> code when dial tone or busy tone is detected.The modem stays in Voice Receive Mode, however, until the DTE issues a key abort to force Online Voice Command Mode.The DTE must issue the H command if it wishes to hang up.7.2.9 Mode SwitchingVoice to FaxIf the modem is in Online Voice Command Mode (i.e., it has gone off-hook with #CLS=8 in effect), the DTE can attempt afax handshake by setting #CLS=1, followed by the A or D command corresponding to fax receive or send. This has theeffect of beginning a fax Class 1 handshake (see #CLS command).Unsuccessful Fax Connection Attempt to VoiceA fax handshake which does not succeed, attempted as the result of the DTE modifying the #CLS setting from voice (8) tofax (1), does not result in the modem hanging up, allowing the DTE the flexibility of commanding a switch back to VoiceMode with #CLS=8.Voice to DataIf the modem is in the Online Voice Command Mode, the DTE can attempt a data handshake by setting #CLS=0 followed bythe A or D command. This has the effect of beginning a Data Mode handshake according to the current Data Mode S-register and command settings.Unsuccessful Data Connection Attempt to VoiceA data handshake which does not succeed, attempted as the result of the DTE modifying the #CLS setting from voice (8) todata (0), does not result in the modem hanging up, allowing the DTE the flexibility of commanding a switch back to VoiceMode with #CLS=8.7.2.10 Caller IDThe modem supports Caller ID by passing the information received in Bell 202 FSK modulation to the DTE after the firstRING detect. The modem supports both formatted and unformatted reporting of Caller ID information received in ICLID(Incoming Call Line ID) format as supported in certain areas of the U.S. and Canada. The DTE enables this feature via the#CID command.
AT Command Reference Manual7-10 10487.3  AT VOICE COMMAND SUMMARYTable 7-4 provides a complete summary of the AT voice commands described in detail in Sections 7.3.1 and 7.3.2. Table 7-4. AT Voice CommandsCommand FunctionA Answering in Voice/Audio Mode.D Dial command in Voice/Audio Mode.H Hang up in Voice/Audio Mode.Z Reset from Voice/Audio Mode.#BDR Select baud rate (turn off autobaud).#CID Enable Caller ID detection and select reporting format.#CLS Select data, fax, or voice/audio.#MDL? Identify model.#MFR? Identify manufacturer.#REV? Identify revision level.#TL Audio output transmit level.#VBQ? Query buffer size.#VBS Bits per sample (ADPCM or PCM).#VBT Beep tone timer.#VCI? Identify compression method (ADPCM).#VLS Voice line select (ADPCM or PCM).#VRA Ringback goes away timer (originate).#VRN Ringback never came timer (originate).#VRX Voice Receive Mode (ADPCM or PCM).#VSD Enable silence deletion (voice receive, ADPCM).#VSK Buffer skid setting.#VSP Silence detection period (voice receive, ADPCM).#VSR Sampling rate selection (ADPCM or PCM).#VSS Silence detection tuner (voice receive, ADPCM).#VTD DTMF tone reporting capability.#VTM Enable timing mark placement.#VTS Generate tone signals.#VTX Voice transmit mode (ADPCM or PCM).7.3.1  Global AT Command Set ExtensionsThe AT commands in the following section are global, meaning that they can be issued in any appropriate mode (i.e., any#CLS setting).For consistency, the command set is divided into action commands and parameters (non-action commands). Thosecommands which are action commands (i.e., those which cause some change in the current operating behavior of themodem) are identified as such, and the remaining commands are parameters.All voice commands that can have a value of 0-255 will not respond error if a value above 255 is entered; the resulting valuewill be the value entered minus 256 or 512, etc.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 7-11ATA - Answering in Voice/AudioThe answer action command works analogously to the way it works in Data and Fax Modes except for the following:1.  When configured for Voice/Audio Mode (#CLS=8), the modem enters Online Voice Command Mode immediately aftergoing off-hook. When the #CLS=8 command is issued, the modem can be programmed to look for 1100 and 1300 Hzcalling tones (see #VTD), thus eliminating the need to do so as part of A command processing. After the VCONmessage is issued, the modem re-enters Online Voice Command Mode while sending any incoming DTMF or CallingTone indications to the DTE as described in Section 7.2.5.2.  After answering in Voice/Audio Mode (#CLS=8), the DTE, as part of its call discrimination processing, can decide tochange the #CLS setting to attempt receiving a fax in Class 1, or to make a data connection. In such a case, the DTEcommands the modem to proceed with the data or fax handshake via the A command even though the modem isalready off-hook.Result Code:VCON Issued in Voice Mode (#CLS=8) immediately after going off-hook.ATD - Dial Command in Voice/AudioThe dial action command works analogously to the way it works in Data or Fax modes. When in Voice/Audio Mode(#CLS=8):1.  The modem attempts to determine when the remote has picked up the telephone line and once this determination hasbeen made, the VCON message is sent to the DTE. This determination is initially made based upon ringback detectionand disappearance. (See #VRA and #VRN commands.)2.  Once connected in Voice/Audio Mode, the modem immediately enters the command state and switches to Online VoiceCommand Mode which enables unsolicited reporting of DTMF and answer tones to the DTE.Parameters: Same as Data and Fax modes.Result Codes:VCON Issued in Voice/Audio Mode (#CLS=8) when the modem determines that the remote modem orhandset has gone off-hook, or when returning to the Online Voice Command Mode. (See #VRAand #VRN.)NO ANSWER Issued in Voice/Audio Mode (#CLS=8) when the modem determines that the remote has notpicked up the line before the S7 timer expires. Though the modem reports "NO ANSWER", theDTE has the responsibility of issuing an ATH (or ATZ) to disconnect the telephone line while#CLS=8.ATH - Hang Up in Voice/AudioThis command works the same as in Data and Fax modes by hanging up (disconnecting) the telephone line. There are,however, some specific considerations when in Voice/Audio Mode:1.  The H command forces #CLS=0, but does not destroy any of the voice parameter settings such as #VBS, #VSP, etc.Therefore, if the DTE wishes to issue an H command and then pursue another voice call, it must issue a subsequent#CLS=8 command, but it need not re-establish the voice parameter settings again unless a change in the settings isdesired.2.  The #BDR setting is forced back to 0, re-enabling autobaud.3.  If the #VLS setting is set to select a device which is not, or does not include the telephone line (such as a local handsetor microphone), the H command deselects this device and reselects the normal default setting (#VLS =0). Normally, theDTE should not issue the H command while connected to a local device such as a handset, because merely selectingthis device results in VCON. The normal sequence of terminating a session with such a device is to use the #VLScommand to select the telephone line, which by definition makes sure it is on-hook.Parameters: Same as Data and Fax modes.Result Codes: Same as Data and Fax modes.
AT Command Reference Manual7-12 1048ATZ - Reset from Voice ModeThis command works the same as in Data and Fax modes. In addition, the Z command resets all voice related parametersto default states, forces the #BDR=0 condition (autobaud enabled), and forces the telephone line to be selected with thehandset on-hook. No voice parameters are stored in NVRAM so the profile loaded does not affect the voice aspects of thiscommand. (Note that when #CLS=8, ATZ causes a hang up if the telephone line is connected.)Parameters: Same as Data and Fax modes.Result Codes: Same as Data and Fax modes.#BDR - Select Baud Rate (Turn off Autobaud)This command forces the modem to select a specific DTE/modem baud rate without further speed sensing on the interface.When a valid #BDR=n command is entered, the OK result code is sent at the current assumed speed. After the OK hasbeen sent, the modem switches to the speed indicated by the #BDR=n command it has just received.When in Online Voice Command Mode and the #BDR setting is nonzero (no autobaud selected), the modem supports a fullduplex DTE interface. This means that the DTE can enter commands at any time, even if the modem is in the process ofsending a shielded code indicating DTMF detection to the DTE. [Note that when #BDR has been set nonzero, the modememploys the S30 Disconnect Inactivity timer, and this timer starts at the point where #BDR is set nonzero. If this periodexpires (nominally 60 seconds) with no activity on the DTE interface, the modem reverts to #BDR=0, #CLS=0, and #VLS=0.]Parameters: n = 0 – 48 (New baud rate is n*2400 bps)Default: 0Result Codes:OK For the supported speeds.ERROR Otherwise.Command options:#BDR? Returns the current setting of the #BDR command as an ASCII decimal value in result codeformat.#BDR=? Returns a message indicating the speeds that are supported.#BDR=0 Enables autobaud detection on the DTE interface.#BDR=n Where 1<n<48. Sends OK message at current speed, then switches to the new speed defined byn*2400 bps unless and until another #BDR=n command is received. Autobaud is disabled, andthe character format is maintained at the format most recently detected.#CID -  Enable Caller ID Detection and Select Reporting FormatThis command selects or disables Caller ID recognition and reporting in any mode.Parameters: n = 0, 1, or 2Default: 0Result Codes:OK n = 0, 1, or 2.ERROR Otherwise.Command options:#CID? Returns the current setting (0,1 or 2) of the #CID command as an ASCII decimal value in resultcode format.#CID=? Returns the message, “0, 1, 2”.#CID=0 Disables Caller ID.#CID=1 Enables formatted Caller ID reporting of ICLID SDM (Single Data Message) andMDM (Multiple Data Message) packets.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 7-13#CID=2 Enables unformatted Caller ID reporting of any ICLID packet received after the first RING cycleincluding SDM, MDM, or call waiting packets.
AT Command Reference Manual7-14 1048#CLS - Select Data, Fax, or Voice/AudioThis command selects Data, Fax, or Voice/Audio Mode from operation in any mode.Parameters: n = 0, 1, 2, or 8Default: 0Result Codes:OK If n = 0, 1, 2, or 8.ERROR Otherwise.Command options:#CLS? Returns the current setting (0, 1, 2, or 8) of the #CLS command as an ASCII decimal value inresult code format.#CLS=? Returns the message, “0, 1, 2, or 8”.#CLS=0 Data. This is similar to setting +FCLASS=0, and instructs the modem to act like a data modem onsubsequent answer or originate operations.When a disconnect or inactivity time out in the non-autobaud mode is detected, the modemautomatically sets the #CLS setting to 0 and hangs up. This ensures that the modem is always ina known state despite disorderly DTE behavior.#CLS=1 Class 1 fax. This is similar to setting +FCLASS=1, and instructs the modem to be a Class 1 faxmodem. Once this is set, either the +FAA or the +FAE command can be used to forcesubsequent answers to be Class 1 adaptive answers.#CLS=2 Class 2 fax. This is similar to setting +FCLASS=2, and instructs the modem to be a Class 2 faxmodem. Once this is set, the +FAA command can be used to force subsequent answers to beClass 2 adaptive answers.#CLS=8 Voice/Audio Mode. This is the main setting the DTE uses to effect directed or adaptive answer ororiginate sequences involving voice modes. All telephone calls initialized by #CLS=8 result (afteranswer or successful call progress) in the modem in Online Voice Command Mode.#MDL? - Identify ModelThis command requests the model number or name of the modem.Command option:#MDL? -  RCV144ACi (Example)#MFR? - Identify ManufacturerThis command requests the modem manufacturer.Command option:#MFR? -  ROCKWELL#REV? - Identify Revision LevelThis command requests the revision level of the modem.Command option:#REV? - XXXX-XXXX-XXX YYY (Those places occupied by “X"'s represent the part number, while those placesoccupied by `Y"'s represent the revision number. The values are determined attime of production.)
AT Command Reference Manual1048 7-157.3.2  AT#V Commands Enabled Only in Voice Mode (#CLS=8)The commands described in the following subsection are extensions to the command set which the modem recognizes onlywhen configured for Voice/Audio Mode with the #CLS=8 command.#TL- Audio Output Transmit LevelThis command provides adjustment of the transmit level of the data pump audio output, affecting both the playback level ofthe handset and speaker and telephone line. Note: This command is not applicable to RC288 and ACF/SP products,however, the command is accepted for command response compatibility only.Parameters: n=0000 to 7FFF if the handset or speaker is selectedDefault: 7FFF, if local handset or speaker is selected3F44, if the phone line is selectedResult Codes:OK If n=0000 to 7FFF#VBQ? - Query Buffer SizeThis query-only command returns the size of the modem's voice transmit and voice receive buffers in ASCII decimal,followed by the OK result code.Parameters: NoneCommand option:#VBQ? Returns the size of the modem voice transmit and voice receive buffers.#VBS - Bits Per SampleThis command selects the degree of ADPCM voice compression or format of linear PCM to be used.Parameters: n = 2 or 4 (ADPCM Voice compression) bits/sample, or 8 (PCM) bits/sampleDefault: 4Result Codes:OK If n=2, 4, or 8ERROR Otherwise.Command options:#VBS? Returns the current setting of the #VBS command as an ASCII decimal value in result codeformat.#VBS=? Returns "2" or "4", which are the ADPCM compression bits/sample rates available, or "8" which isthe PCM bits/sample rate. The 2 and 4 bits/sample rates are correlated with the #VCI querycommand response which provides the single compression method available. The "8" represents8-bit unsigned linear PCM format, respectively.#VBS=2 Selects 2 bits per sample ADPCM (valid for #VSR = 7200).#VBS=4 Selects 4 bits per sample ADPCM (valid for #VSR = 7200).#VBS=8 Selects 8 bits per sample PCM (valid for #VSR = 7200 or #VSR = 11025).
AT Command Reference Manual7-16 1048#VBT - Beep Tone TimerThis command defines the time period, in 10ths of a second up to 4 seconds (40) which is used by the modem as the DTMFor fixed tone duration for generating tones while in Online Voice Command Mode.Parameters: n = 0 – 40 (0 – 4 seconds)Default: 10Result Codes:OK If n = 0 – 40.ERROR Otherwise.Command options:#VBT? Returns the current setting of the #VBT command as an ASCII decimal value in result codeformat.#VBT=? Returns the message, “0-40”.#VBT=0 Disables the tone generation capability.#VBT=1 to 40 Sets tone duration time.#VCI? - Identify Compression MethodThis command provides a unique character string which may be used for identifying the proprietary compression method ofRockwell ADPCM.Parameters: No parameters supportedDefault: No parameters supportedResult Codes:OK Returned after the Compression Identifier string.ERROR Returned if attempting to assign a parameter value.Command Options:#VCI? Returns the Compression Identifier string which may used to identify the proprietary voice dataencoding of Rockwell ADPCM.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 7-17#VLS - Voice Line SelectThis action command can be used to select which devices are routed through the modem.Parameters: n = 0-9 as supported by the modem model. [This is the device position number (not devicenumber) as reflected in response to #VLS=?]Default: 0Result Codes:OK If n = 0-9 as supported by the modem model.VCON If device selected does not connect to the telephone line. (A speaker is such a device, but atelephone line with speaker ON is not such a device, and generates OK.)ERROR If n does not equal 0-9 or if telephone line or local handset is already off-hook.Command options:#VLS? This query returns the current setting of the #VLS command as an ASCII decimal value in resultcode format.#VLS=? This query requests a report of the device types available for selection. The response is a numberfrom 0 to 4 corresponding the device position number (see Table 7-5).#VLS=0 The default option on the modem. This command instructs the modem that when entering any ofthe three voice operating submodes (Online Command, Transmit, or Receive), that the telephoneline interface should be routed through the modem. The OK response is sent to the DTE, and anyprevious connection is lost (i.e., the modem ends up on-hook as a result of issuing this commandto connect to the telephone line).#VLS=1 This command instructs the modem to route only the handset through the modem. This settingcan be chosen before recording a greeting message.#VLS=2 This command instructs the modem to route only the speaker through the modem. This settingcan be chosen before playing back any message. The modem immediately switches to OnlineVoice Command Mode, and the VCON response is generated for completeness. However, sincethis is an output only device, nothing of consequence can happen until the DTE sends the #VTXcommand.#VLS=3 This command instructs the modem that only the auxiliary input device (microphone) should berouted through the modem. This setting can be chosen before recording a greeting message.#VLS=4 This command is the same as #VLS =0, except that the modem enables the internal speaker aswell as the telephone line/handset circuit.#VLS=5 This command selects telephone emulation mode while in #CLS=8 mode. Speakerphoneoperation is entered during Voice On-line (VCON) mode after completing dialing (ATD) oranswering (ATA). #VLS=5 will respond ERROR if speakerphone is supported.#VLS=6 This command selects speakerphone mode while in #CLS=8 mode. Telephone emulationoperation is entered during Voice On-line (VCON) mode after completing dialing (ATD) oranswering (ATA). #VLS=6 will respond ERROR if speakerphone is not supported.#VLS=7 This command, valid after Voice On-line mode, mutes the local handset by switching the handsetor speakerphone out of the telephone line path if in #VLS=0 or #VLS=6 mode. To unmute, thehost software should issue AT#VLS=0 or AT#VLS=6 to return to phone line or speakerphonemode, respectively. On hardware designs which incorporate the audio codec, #VLS=7 can beused to route the codec's output through the phone line to provide music-on-hold feature.#VLS=8 (Valid after Voice On-line mode.) This command engages the Caller ID relay to allow recording ofconversation when using a handset by routing the signal to the audio codec (if populated). Todeactivate the Caller ID relay, the host should issue an AT#VLS=0 or AT#VLS=6 to return tophone line or speakerphone mode, respectively.#VLS=9 This command routes the handset to the sound codec to allow recording/playback of audio (e.g.greeting messages) through the local handset.
AT Command Reference Manual7-18 1048 Table 7-5. Device Types Supported by #VLSASCII Digit Device Type and Considerations0Telephone Line with Telephone handset. This is the default device selected. In this configuration, theuser can pick up a handset which is connected to the same telephone line as the modem, and * recordboth sides of a conversation with a remote station. The modem currently supports one telephoneline/handset, which is in the first position of the #VLS =? response. (Note that the modem can interfaceto multiple telephone lines by having “0”'s in multiple positions in the #VLS ? response.) If a telephoneline is selected, the modem must be on-hook or it hangs up. The OK message is generated.1Transmit/Receive Device (other than telephone line). This is a handset, headset, or speaker-phonepowered directly by the modem. When such a device is selected, the modem immediately enters OnlineVoice Command Mode, DTMF monitoring is enabled if applicable, and the VCON response is sent. Themodem supports one such device as the second device listed in the #VLS =? response.2Transmit Only Device. Normally, this is the onboard speaker. When this device is selected, the modemimmediately enters Online Voice Command Mode, and the VCON response is sent. The modemsupports selection of the internal speaker as the third device listed in #VLS =? response.3Receive Only Device. Normally, this is a microphone. When such a device is selected, the modemimmediately enters Online Voice Command Mode, DTMF monitoring is enabled if applicable, and theVCON response is sent. The modem supports one microphone as the fourth element returned in the#VLS =? response.4Telephone line with Speaker ON and handset. This device type can be used to allow the DTE toselect the telephone line/handset (if picked up) with the modem speaker also turned ON. This can beused by the DTE to allow the user to monitor an incoming message as it is recorded.5Telephone Emulation. This is a headset or speakerphone powered directly by the modem. When sucha device is selected, the modem immediately enters Online Voice Command Mode, DTMF monitoring isenabled if applicable, and the VCON response is sent.6Speakerphone. This is a headset or speakerphone powered directly by the modem. When such adevice is selected, the modem immediately enters Online Voice Command Mode, DTMF monitoring isenabled if applicable, and the VCON response is sent.7Muting the Local Handset During Phone Conversation - Music on Hold. This command mutes thelocal handset by switching the handset or speakerphone out of the telephone line path if in #VLS=0 or#VLS=6 mode. To unmute, the host software should issue AT#VLS=0 or AT#VLS=6 to return to phoneline or speakerphone mode, respectively.On hardware designs which incorporate the audio codec, #VLS=7 can be used to route the codec'soutput through the phone line to provide music-on-hold feature.8Recording a Handset Conversation on Phone Line. This command engages the Caller ID relay toallow recording of conversation when using a handset by routing the signal to the audio codec (ifpopulated). To deactivate the Caller ID relay, the host should issue AT#VLS=0 or AT#VLS=6 to return tophone line or speakerphone mode, respectively.9Recording/Playback from Handset through Sound Chip.This command (valid after Voice On-linemode) routes the handset to the sound codec to allow recording/playback of audio (e.g. greetingmessages) through the local handset.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 7-19#VRA - Ringback Goes Away Timer (Originate)This command can be used, when originating a voice/audio call (#CLS=8) to set the “Ringback Goes Away” timer value, i.e.,an amount of time (in units of 100 ms) measured from when the ringback cadence stops once detected. If ringback is notdetected within this period, the modem assumes that the remote has picked up the line and switches to Online VoiceCommand Mode. Every time a ringback cycle is detected, this timer is reset.Parameters: n = 0 – 255 (0 – 2.55 seconds)Default: 70Result Code: OKResult Code:OK If n = 0 – 255.ERROR Otherwise.Command options:#VRA? Returns the current setting of the #VRA command as an ASCII decimal value in result codeformat.#VRA=? Returns the message, “0-255”.#VRA=0 Turns off the “ringback goes away timer.” After one ringback, the dialing modem sends VCONand enters Online Voice Command Mode immediately.#VRA=n Where n defines the period without ringback (after at least one ringback has been detected) in100 ms units.#VRN - Ringback Never Came Timer (Originate)This command can be used when originating a voice/audio call (#CLS=8) to set the “Ringback Never Came” timer value, i.e.,an amount of time (in units of 100 ms) measured from completion of dialing. If ringback is not detected within this period, themodem assumes the remote has picked up the line and switches to Online Voice Command Mode.Parameters: n = 0 – 255 (0 – 2.55 seconds)Default: 100Result Code:OK If n = 0 – 255.ERROR Otherwise.Command options:#VRN? Returns the current setting of the #VRN command as an ASCII decimal value in result codeformat.#VRN=? Returns the message, “0-255”.#VRN=0 Turns off the “ringback never came timer.” After dialing, the modem sends VCON andimmediately enters Online Voice Command Mode.#VRN=n Where n defines the period without ringback after dialing in 100 ms units.#VRX - Voice ReceiveThis action command is only valid if the modem is in the Online Voice Command Mode (indicated previously with the VCONmessage), and is the switch to the Voice Receive Mode. This command is used when a voice file is to be received from theline, microphone, or handset. The #VLS command should have been previously issued to select the input source.Parameters: NoneResult Codes:CONNECT When voice/audio transfer from modem to DTE can begin.ERROR If #VLS=0 and not connected to any input device.
AT Command Reference Manual7-20 1048#VSD - Enable Silence Deletion (Voice Receive) [ADPCM]This command provides no function other than command response compatibility.Parameters: n = 0 or 1Default: 0Result Code:OK If n = 0 or 1.ERROR Otherwise.Command options:#VSD? Returns the current setting of the #VSD command as an ASCII decimal value in result codeformat.#VSD=? Returns the message, “0,1”.#VSD=0 Command provides no function other than command response compatibility.#VSD=1 Command provides no function other than command response compatibility.#VSK - Buffer Skid SettingThis command queries and sets the number of bytes of spare space, after the XOFF threshold is reached, in the modem'sbuffer during Voice Transmit Mode. This equates to the “skid” spare buffer space, or the amount of data the DTE cancontinue to send after being told to stop sending data by the modem, before the modem voice transmit buffer overflows.Parameter: n = 255 (Number of bytes of “skid spare buffer space)Default: 255Result Code:OK If n = 255.ERROR Otherwise.Command options:#VSK? Returns the current setting of the #VSK command as an ASCII decimal value in result codeformat.#VSK=? Returns the message, “255”.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 7-21#VSP - Silence Detection Period (Voice Receive) [ADPCM]This command sets the Voice Receive Mode silence detection period (inactivity timer) value. The parameter, in units of 100ms, can be used when receiving voice data. This is an amount of time, which if elapsed without receiving any ADPCM data,causes the modem to send the <DLE>s or <DLE>q codes after insuring that the buffer is empty.The modem determines what constitutes silence. This involves monitoring and debouncing the modem value for averageenergy. If this debounced value is less than an arbitrary threshold constituting the modem's definition of silence for a periodgreater than that defined by the #VSP setting, the modem sends the <DLE>q or <DLE>s shielded code to the DTE.Parameters: n = 0 – 255 (0 – 25.5 seconds)Default: 55Result Code:OK If n = 0 – 255.ERROR Otherwise.Command options:#VSP? Returns the current setting of the #VSP command as an ASCII decimal value in result codeformat.#VSP=? Returns the message, “0-255”.#VSP=0 Turns off the silence period detection timer.#VSP=n Where n defines the period without received voice data in 100 ms units.#VSR - Sampling Rate SelectionThis parameter, along with the bits per sample (#VBS) command, determines the necessary DTE interface speed to transmitand receive in Voice/Audio Mode.Parameters: n=7200 (7200 Hz sampling rate for ADPCM or PCM), orn=11025 (11.025 kHz sampling rate for PCM only)Default: 7200Result Codes:OK If n=7200, or if n=11025 and #VBS=8ERROR OtherwiseCommand options:#VSR? Returns the current setting of the #VSR command as an ASCII decimal value in result codeformat.#VSR=? Returns the message "7200, 11025"#VSR=7200 Selects 7200 Hz sampling rate#VSR=11025 Selects 11.025 kHz sampling rate
AT Command Reference Manual7-22 1048#VSS - Silence Detection Tuner (Voice Receive) [ADPCM]This command enables or disables the Voice Receive mode silence detection, and controls the sensitivity employed by themodem in ADPCM compressing periods of silence.Parameters: n = 0 – 3Default: 0Result Codes:OK If n = 0 – 3.ERROR Otherwise.Command options:#VSS? Returns the current setting of the #VSS command as an ASCII decimal value in result codeformat.#VSS=? Returns the message “0,1,2,3".#VSS =0 Disables silence detection by the modem when in Voice Receive Mode (default).#VSS =1 Least sensitive setting. When this command is received by the modem, the system is configuredto a state which is least likely to detect and compress periods of silence, but still able to do so ifthe line is really quiet.#VSS =2 Midrange setting. When this command is received by the modem, the system is configured to astate which is likely to be the best overall compromise on normal telephone lines.#VSS =3 Most sensitive setting. When this command is received by the modem, the system is configuredto a state which is most likely to detect and compress periods of silence.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 7-23#VTD - DTMF Tone ReportingThis command queries and controls which types of tones can be detected and reported to the DTE via shielded codes inVoice Transmit, Voice Receive, and Online Voice Command Modes.Parameters: i, j, k (three ASCII hexadecimal bit maps)Default: 3F, 3F, 3FResult Codes:OK If bits supported with #VTD=? are selected.ERROR Otherwise.Command options:#VTD? Returns the current setting of the #VTD command as an ASCII decimal value in result codeformat.#VTD=? Returns the tone reporting capabilities of the modem.#VTD=i,j,k Where i,j,k corresponds (in ASCII hexadecimal) to the desired capabilities, as shown in Table 7-6,for Voice Transmit, Voice Receive, and Online Voice Command Modes, respectively. Table 7-6. #VTD Tone Detection/Reporting Bit SettingsBit Description0 0 = Disable DTMF tone capability;1 = Enable DTMF tone capability 1.1 0 = Disable V.25 1300 Hz Calling tone capability;1 = Enable V.25 1300 Hz Calling tone capability 1.2 0 = Disable T.30 1100 Hz Facsimile Calling tone capability;1 = Enable T.30 1100 Hz Facsimile Calling tone capability 1.3 0 = Disable V.25/T.30 2100 Hz Answer tone capability;1 = Enable V.25/T.30 2100 Hz Answer tone capability 1.4 0 = Disable Bell 2225 Hz Answer tone capability;1 = Enable Bell 2225 Hz Answer tone capability 1.5 0 = Disable call progress tone and cadence (e.g., busy and dial tone) capability;1 = Enable call progress tone and cadence (e.g., busy and dial tone) capability 1.6-7 Reserved.Notes: 1. The modem detects this tone/cadence, and reports it via a shielded code to the DTE.2. Tone detection is only performed when the sampling rate is 7.2 kHz (see the #VSRcommand).
AT Command Reference Manual7-24 1048#VTM - Enable Timing Mark PlacementThis command controls the placement of <DLE><T> timing marks by the DCE in the data stream during ADPCM recording.Parameters: n=0 (disabled) or 10 (1 second interval)Default: n=0 (disabled)Result Codes:OK If n=0 or 10ERROR OtherwiseCommand Options:#VTM? Returns the current setting of the #VTM command as an ASCII decimal value in result codeformat.#VTM=? Returns "0, 10"#VTS - Generate Tone Signals (Online Voice Command)This action command can be issued to play one of more DTMF or other tones (such as a “beep") if and only if the modem isin the Online Voice Command Mode and the sampling rate (see the #VSR command) is set to 7.2 kHz. The modem parsesand plays the tones defined in the parameter in the order listed, and no key abort is accepted. The parameter can havethree types of elements separated by commas, and following "#VTS=":Dual or Single Tones with Variable Duration: These are represented by the substring [x,y,z] (enclosed in squarebrackets, "[ ]", as shown) in the parameter field. Each such substring consists of three sub-elements corresponding to the two frequencies (i.e., x and y), and the duration (i.e., z).[x,y,z] x represents the first frequency (0 or 200-3000 Hz)y represents second frequency (0 or 200-3000 Hz)z represents the duration (which is ASCII decimal in units of 100 ms)DTMF Digits with Variable Duration. This is represented by a substring {x,z} (enclosed in curly braces, "{}", asshown) in the parameter field. Each such substring consists of two sub-elementscorresponding to a DTMF digit (i.e., x) and the duration (i.e., z).{x,z} x represents the DTMF digit (0-9,A-D,*,#)z represents the duration (which is ASCII decimal in units of 100 ms)DTMF Digits, with duration defined by #VBT. This is represented by a value x (non-bracketed) corresponding to aDTMF digit (i.e., x) in the parameter field.x x represents the DTMF digit (0-9,A-D,*,#), with the duration defined by #VBTCommand options:#VTS=[x,y,z], {x,z}, and/or x, as described above.Parameters: The tone generation consists of elements in a list with each element separated by commas.Result Codes:OK Command to play tones on currently selected device is accepted.ERROR Command was not issued during Online Voice Command Mode or string is grammaticallyincorrect.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 7-25#VTX - Voice TransmitThis action command can be issued if and only if the modem is in the Online Voice Command Mode (indicated previouslywith the VCON message), and is the switch to Voice Transmit Mode. #VTX is used when a voice file is to be transmitted tothe line, speaker, or handset. The #VLS command should have been previously issued to select the output source.Parameters: NoneResult Codes:CONNECT When voice transmission by DTE can begin.ERROR If #VLS =0 and output device not connected.#VGT - Set Playback Volume in the Command StateThe #VGT command allows the DTE to set the playback volume of the headphone and speaker outputs via the on-boarddigital potentiometer while in the command state. The application can use #VGT=? command to determine the range of validvalues. The lowest value in the range means the lowest transmit level while the highest in the range means the highesttransmit level.Parameters: n=128 to 131Default: 129Result Codes:OK if n=128 to 131ERROR OtherwiseCommand Options:#VGT=? Returns "128-131" if the external volume control is present, otherwise "128".VGT? 129 (default).<DLE><u> and <DLE><d> - Set Playback Volume in the Data StateThe <DLE>u and <DLE>d action commands allow the DTE to adjust the playback volume of the headphone and speakeroutputs via the on-board digital potentiometer while in the data state. The application may embed the <DLE>u and <DLE>dcodes into the playback data to adjust the volume during playback. Each <DLE>u or <DLE>d will increment or decrementthe transmit level by 1 unit, respectively. Adjustment by a value greater than 1 may be achieved by transmitting a string ofthe appropriate <DLE> codes. A string consisting of "<DLE>u<DLE>u<DLE>u<DLE>u<DLE>u", for example, would increasethe playback volume by a value of 5 units. The <DLE>u and <DLE>d codes can be used to adjust the volume within therange of 128-228.Command Options:<DLE><u> Increment volume (transmit level) by 1 unit in data state.<DLE><d> Decrement volume (transmit level) by 1 unit in data state.7.3.3 Speakerphone CommandsModem speakerphone models support full-duplex speakerphone operation. Hardware designs typically include an audiocodec which support functions such as music on hold, telephone/speakerphone conversation recording, and handsetrecording through the audio codec.This section describes the AT commands used by host software to enable speakerphone operation and route the audiocodec to and from the telephone line/handset. Also described is a procedure to operate speakerphone, headset, andhandset modes with VoiceView.The #VLS=6 setting selects speakerphone mode while in #CLS=8 or +FCLASS=80 mode. Speakerphone operation isentered during Voice On-line (VCON) mode after completing dialing (ATD) or answering (ATA).
AT Command Reference Manual7-26 1048Originating a Call in Speakerphone ModeTo initiate a call with the speakerphone, issue:AT#CLS=8AT#VRN=0AT#VLS=6 (Selects the speakerphone)It is recommended to set the VRN command to 0 which disables ringback detection before reporting the VCON message.ATDT<number>The modem then responds with:VCON (based on the AT#VRA and #VRN setting)Additional DTMF (for example in a voice mail application) can be entered by issuing:AT#VTS=<digit>When DTMF digits are sent, it is recommended that the default value of the tone length be changed to 100 ms using thecommand #VBT:AT#VBT=1The call can be transferred (PBX function) by entering the flash dial modifier (AT#VTS=!).Terminate the call with:ATHAnswering a Call in Speakerphone ModeTo answer a call in speakerphone mode, issue:AT#CLS=8AT#VLS=6 (Selects the speakerphone)When the modem detects the ring, the modems reports:RINGThe DTE can answer with:ATAThe modem sets the speakerphone and sends:VCONTerminate the call with:ATHMuting the Local Handset During Phone Conversation - Music on HoldTo mute the local handset during a phone conversation, issue the the following command:AT#VLS=7 (valid after Voice On-line mode)This command mutes the local handset by switching the handset or speakerphone out of the telephone line path if in#VLS=0 or #VLS=6 mode.To unmute, the host should issue an AT#VLS=0 or AT#VLS=6 to return to phone line or speakerphone mode, respectively.On hardware designs which incorporate the audio codec, #VLS=7 can be used to route the codec's output through thephone line to provide music-on-hold feature.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 7-27Recording a Handset Conversation on the Phone LineTo recording a handset conversation on the phone line, issue:AT#VLS=8 (valid after Voice On-line mode)This command engages the Caller ID relay to allow recording of conversation when using a handset by routing the signal tothe audio codec (if populated).To deactivate the Caller ID relay, the host should issue an AT#VLS=0 or AT#VLS=6 to return to phone line or speakerphonemode, respectively.Recording/Playback from Handset through Sound ChipTo recording/playback from the handset through a sound chip (valid after voice on-line mode), issue:AT#VLS=9This command routes the handset to the sound codec to allow recording/playback of audio (e.g. greeting messages) throughthe local handset.#SPK ParameterThe setting of the speakerphone can be changed with the AT#SPK command:AT#SPK=<mute>,<spkr>,<mic>The #SPK command can be used to control the microphone state (mute or on), adjust the speaker volume, and microphonegain. The #SPK parameters are are valid only after the modem has entered the Voice Online (VCON) mode while in the#VLS=6 setting (after a VCON during originate or answer). The modem will respond "ERROR"  otherwise.Parameters (Except ACF/AFCL):<mute> Mute Parameter Number0 microphone mute1 microphone on (default)2 Room Monitor mode (mic on max AGC, speaker off)<spkr> Speaker Output AttentuationRange: 0 to15 (speaker attenuation in 2 dB steps)0 0 dB attenuation.5 10 dB attenuation (default).15 30 dB attentuation16 Speaker mute<mic> Microphone Gain ParameterRange: 0 to 30 0 dB gain1 6 dB gain (default)2 9.5 dB gain3 12 dB gainParameters (ACF/AFCL):<mute> Mute Parameter Number0 microphone mute1 microphone on (default)2 Room Monitor mode (mic on max AGC, speaker off)
AT Command Reference Manual7-28 1048<spkr> Speaker Output AttentuationRange: 0 to15 (speaker attenuation in 2 dB steps)0 0 dB attenuation.5 10 dB attenuation (default).15 30 dB attentuation16 Speaker mute<mic> Microphone Gain ParameterRange: 0 to 30 0 dB gain1 10 dB gain2 15 dB gain (default)3 20 dB gain<mic> Except ACF/AFCL ACF/AFCL0 0 dB 0 dB1 6 dB gain (default) 10 dB gain2 9.5 dB gain 15 dB gain (default)3 12 dB gain 20 dB gain
AT Command Reference Manual1048 7-29It is not necessary to enter all <mute>,<spkr>,<mic> options while issuing AT#SPK.Examples:AT#SPK= <mute>,,,  Changes the <mute> settingAT#SPK = ,<spkr>,, Changes the <spkr> settingAT#SPK = ,, <mic> Changes the <mic> settingAT#SPK = <mute>,<spkr>,, Changes the <mute> and <spkr> settingsAT#SPK = <mute>,,<mic> Changes the <mute> and <mic> settingsAT#SPK = ,<spkr>,<mic> Changes the <spkr> and <mic> settingsRoom MonitorThe modem can be configured to a listen only mode where the microphone automatic gain control is set to maximum (50dB).  The feature is called Room Monitor and the allow an application where a remote caller calls the computer to monitorwhat is happening the room.  The following setting will enable Room Monitor mode.AT#SPK=2,,,Switching Between #VLS SettingsSwitching between different #VLS settings during Voice On-line mod is permitted although only certain combinations may beuseful. The #VLS settings are grouped into local and remote.  Switching between #VLS settings should be within either localor remote groups.Local #VLS settings are defined as the modem being on-hook and isolated from the telco lineduring Voice On-line (VCON) mode.  The local settings are #VLS=1, #VLS=2, #VLS=3, and #VLS=9.  Remote #VLS settingsare defined as the modem being off-hook and connected to the telco line during Voice On-line mode.  The remote settingsare #VLS=0, #VLS=4, #VLS=5, #VLS=6. #VLS=7, and #VLS=8.Example 1An example of how host software will switch #VLS settings in local mode is an application which records a greeting messagethrough the handset and review the message through the speaker.  To accomplish this functionality, the modem is set to#VLS=1 (local handset recording/playback) during the recording process and is switched to #VLS=2 (playback throughspeaker) to monitor the playback.Example 2An example of how host software will switch #VLS settings in remote mode is a telephone answering application which has acall screening mode.  The application plays a greeting message with the speaker off (#VLS=0) and switches the speaker onwhen recording the incoming message (#VLS=4).  If the user decides to answer the call he picks up the handset (a <DLE>tis reported to the software), the recording process will stop and the modem releases the line (ATH).Reporting of Local Handset StatusThe modem reports the off-hook to on-hook and on-hook to off-hook transition of the local handset by the <DLE>h and<DLE>t characters, respectively.  The handset status is reported after the issuing of the AT#CLS=8 command and updatedwhenever transitions of the handset status are detected.  This handset status reporting does not depend if the modem is inVoice On-line (VCON) mode.This is useful for auto dialer applications which need to know the handset transitions during and after the dialing process.
AT Command Reference Manual7-30 10487.3.4  Using VoiceView with Speakerphone, Headset, and Handset modesHandset (#VLS=0), speakerphone (#VLS=6), or headset mode (#VLS=5) can be selected during VoiceView mode(+FCLASS=80), when dialing is done on the handset. The ATA command is not accepted while in VoiceView mode inaccordance with the VoiceView Protocol specification. While in VoiceView mode, the modem can alternate between handsetmode (#VLS=0) or speakerphone mode (#VLS=6) settings for voice conversation.To terminate a call using a handset in VoiceView mode, hang up the handset.To terminate a speakerphone call in VoiceView mode, issue the ATH command.Example 3Originate a VoiceView call with handset dialing and switch to speakerphone and handset modes:DTE commands DCE Response FunctionPick up handset, dial number, and establish voiceconversation.AT+FCLASS=80 Enable VoiceView mode.OKAT#VLS=6 Switch to speakerphone mode.OK(Establish VoiceView Data Mode using normal VoiceViewprocedures.)Continue with speakerphone conversation.AT#VLS=0 Switch to handset for privacy.OKHang up handset to terminate call.Example 4Originate a VoiceView call with handset dialing and switch to speakerphone mode:DTE commands DCE Response FunctionPick up handset, dial number, and establish voiceconversation.AT+FCLASS=80 Enable VoiceView mode.OKAT#VLS=6 Switch to speakerphone mode.OK(Establish VoiceView Data Mode using normal VoiceViewprocedures.)Continue with speakerphone conversation.ATH Terminate speakerphone call.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 7-31Using Modem as Dialer Prior to VoiceView ModeTo use the modem to dial a call,  the modem must be in Voice On-line mode (via #CLS=8) to dial before enabling VoiceViewmode.  VoiceView mode can enabled by the AT+FCLASS=80 parameter after Voice On-line (VCON) mode in handset,speakerphone or handset emulation modes. The modem can be switched between handset (#VLS=0) and speakerphone(#VLS=6) modes during +FCLASS=80, as described in the previous section.Example 5Originate VoiceView call in Speakerphone mode:DTE commands DCE Response FunctionAT#CLS=8#VRN=0#VLS=6 Set modem to Speakerphone mode.OKATDTnnnnnnn Dial remote caller.VCON Call established.AT+FCLASS=80 Enable VoiceView mode.OK(Establish VoiceView Data Mode using normal VoiceViewprocedures.)Continue with speakerphone conversation.ATH Terminate speakerphone call.
AT Command Reference Manual7-32 10487.4 S-REGISTERSThe following S-Register is global, meaning that it can be set in any appropriate mode (i.e., any #CLS setting).S30 - Disconnect Inactivity TimerRange: n = 0 – 255Default: 0 (OFF, which means DTE should usually set it to some value for Voice)Command options:S30=0 Disconnect Inactivity timer off. No matter how long it might continue, the modem neverspontaneously hangs up the telephone line or switches to autobaud mode as a result of inactivity.S30=1 to 255 This is the period of time (in seconds), which if expired causes the modem to hang up thetelephone line if it is off-hook and no data has passed during the period. The timer is also activewhenever the #BDR setting is non-zero. In order to avoid a state where speed sense is disabled(even though the PC can crash, come back up, and try to issue commands at what should be asupported speed), the inactivity time-out occurs if there is no data passed on the DTE interfacewithin the S30 period, even if the modem is on-hook. DTE software must not select a nonzerosetting for #BDR until it is ready to establish a telephone call or virtual connection to a speaker ormicrophone. When there is an inactivity time out with #CLS=8, the modem always forces #CLS=0and #BDR=0.7.5  RESULT CODES FOR VOICE OPERATIONVCON VCON is sent when the modem is configured for voice/audio (#CLS=8), or when after answeringor originating a call, the modem enters the Online Voice Command Mode for the first time.Typically, this is immediately after an off-hook in answer mode, and after ringback ceases inoriginate mode. VCON is also sent when the DTE requests a switch from Voice Transmit Mode toOnline Voice Command Mode by issuing a <DLE><ETX> to the modem, or when the DTErequests a switch from Voice Receive Mode to Online Voice Command Mode via the key abort.CONNECT CONNECT is sent when switching from the Online Voice Command Mode to either Voice ReceiveMode via the #VRX command, or to Voice Transmit Mode via the #VTX command. This messageis sent to the DTE to inform it that it may begin receiving or sending ADPCM or PCM data.7.6  EXAMPLES OF VOICE OPERATIONSee Tables 7-7 through 7-13.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 7-33 Table 7-7. Record a Greeting MessageDTE to Modem Modem to DTE Description and Interpretation#CLS=8 Configure the modem for Voice Mode.OK The modem confirms command implemented, and is now set up for voice.#VBS=4 The DTE asks for 4-bit compression (ADPCM). The DTE needs to work at 38,400 bpssince after start and stop bits are added, the speed increases to 36,000 bps.OK The modem is configured for 4-bit compression.S30=60 DTE wants to insure that the modem can recover even if DTE dies with the baud rateset to a speed which cannot be speed sensed.OK Modem now has Disconnect Inactivity timer set to 1 minute. If no activity takes placeafter a connection, or no DTE activity takes place after #BDR is changed, the modemreverts to #CLS=0, #BDR=0.#BDR=16 The DTE knows that compression requires a 38,400 bps speed, so it forces this as thenew speed. (For this example, lets say that the DTE was sending all commands,including this one, at 2400 bps.)OK This OK message is sent at 2400 bps, but the modem then switches to 38,400 bps. Allsubsequent commands are assumed to be sent at 38,400 bps. If the DTE does notswitch to 38,400 bps after the OK<CR><LF>, it will not recognize the data streamcoming from the modem. The S30 timer is now active.#VSP=20 The DTE changes its own speed to 38,400 bps and sends this command to set up thesilence detection period for 2 seconds.OK The modem agrees. When receiving voice data, 2 seconds of silence terminates theReceive Mode. For handset operation, this amounts to a hang up.#VSS =1 The DTE has decided to use level “1” silence detection sensitivity, meaning it is makingit somewhat more difficult to delete and compress silence for the modem, but expectsthat when the user has hung up the handset, the silence is indeed detected. The DTEhas tried to improve the quality of the message because it knows this is a handsetoperation. The #VSP timer is based upon average energy readings from the modem.OK The modem confirms command reception.#VLS=? Find out what type of devices are supported by the product.0,1,2,3,4OKThe modem tells the DTE that is has a telephone line with handset (#VLS=0), aninput/output device such as a handset or speaker-phone (#VLS=1), and an output onlydevice such as a speaker.#VLS=1 Select the handset as the input device to be used by the modem.VCON The modem agrees, switches out the telephone line, switches in the handset, and themodem enters Online Voice Command Mode. Since this is a handset, and since thebaud rate has been preselected with #BDR, this also means that DTMF detection andreporting is now enabled. The user can pick up the telephone and send tones at thispoint, which are delivered as shielded codes to the DTE, although the voice data is notyet being passed.
AT Command Reference Manual7-34 1048 Table 7-7. Record a Greeting Message [Cont’d]DTE to Modem Modem to DTE Description and Interpretation#VRX This tells the modem that the DTE is ready to receive a voice message at the currentcompression/sampling settings.CONNECT The modem tells the DTE that it can now expect data. The modem enters VoiceReceive Mode. DTMF monitoring is still enabled as well as ADPCM data flow.<Data> User says: “Hello, this is me, press * to skip this message. I'm happy that you havecalled, so press 5 to send your fax, or you can leave your message at the beep.” Userthen hangs up, the message is buffered to the DTE, and the DTE waits for themessage to end. The DTE should have some kind of maximum timer running to ensurethat the user won't speak longer than some predetermined limit. Alternatively, the DTEcan require the user to enter a DTMF tone to terminate transmission of the message tothe DTE.<DLE>q The modem has noticed (#VSP time out) that the user has finished. The modemreports this while staying in Voice Receive Mode. DTMF detection and reporting is stillactive. The DTE now has the entire greeting message on disk.<DLE>* The user has inadvertently pressed the “*” button, but the DTE is not interested in thispresently.! The DTE issues a key abort to switch to Online Voice Command Mode.<DLE><ETX>VCONThe modem exits Voice Receive Mode and switches to Online Voice Command Mode.#VLS=0 The DTE did not really have to do this, but wants to make sure that it gets no moreDTMF codes from the handset. Selection of the telephone line here forces the modemout of Online Voice Command Mode, which is equivalent to hanging up.OK
AT Command Reference Manual1048 7-35 Table 7-8. Playback a Greeting MessageDTE to Modem Modem toDTEDescription and Interpretation#CLS=8 Configure the modem for Voice Mode.OK The modem confirms command reception, and is now set up for voice.#VBS=4 The DTE asks for 4-bit compression. The data from the DTE needs to travel at 38,400bps since after start and stop bits are added, the speed increases to 36,000 bps.OK The modem is configured for 4-bit compression (ADPCM).#BDR=16 The DTE knows that compression requires a 38,400 bps speed, so it forces this as thenew speed. (For this example, lets say that the DTE was sending all commands,including this one, at 4800 bps.)OK This OK message is sent at 4800 bps, but the modem switches to 38,400 bps. Allsubsequent commands are assumed to be sent at 38,400 bps. The DTE should switchafter the <CR><LF> following the OK. The S30 timer is now active.#VLS=2 Select the speaker as the output device to be used by the modem.VCON The modem confirms command reception, and enters Online Voice Command Mode.Since this is an output only device, nothing more can happen yet.#VTX This tells the modem that the DTE is ready to send voice per the currentcompression/sampling settings.CONNECT The modem tells the DTE that it can now send data. The modem enters VoiceTransmit Mode and ADPCM data flow begins.<Data> The DTE sends data. The modem waits 1 second before starting to transmit to thespeaker to ensure uninterrupted data flow. If the voice transmit buffer runs empty, thetransmitter is disabled.<DLE><ETX> The DTE has finished its transmission and now instructs the modem to enter OnlineVoice Command Mode after emptying the voice transmit buffer.VCON The modem tells the DTE it is done. If the DTE sends the <DLE><ETX> before themodem has finished transmitting all the data in its buffer, the DTE must wait for thisresponse. (VCON indicates that the DTE can send more data at any time with #VTX.)
AT Command Reference Manual7-36 1048 Table 7-9. Answer Call/Play Greeting/Record MessageDTE to Modem Modem to DTE Description and Interpretation#CLS=8 Configure the modem for Voice Mode. Note that the #BDR setting is assumed to bezero here, meaning that no time-out occurs forcing #CLS=0.OK The modem agrees, and is now set up for voice.#VBS=4 The DTE asks for 4-bit compression for greeting message playback (ADPCM). TheDTE needs to work at 38,400 bps since after start and stop bits are added, the speedincreases to 36,000 bps.OK The modem is configured for 4-bit compression.#VSS =2 Sets silence detection sensitivity to midrange.OK The modem confirms command reception.#VLS=0 Select the telephone line as the source, ensuring that the modem is now on-hook.DTMF detection is now off regardless of the previous setting of #VLS.OK The modem confirms command reception, and it switches in the telephone line.RING Some time later, we receive the first call. (Note that the modem also processes CallerID information at this time.)#CLS=8 Configure the modem for Voice Mode again. Although the modem has already been soconfigured, it is a good idea to select #CLS=8 directly following a RING because innormal use, any S30 time-out or hang up during Voice Mode forces #CLS=0.OK The modem agrees, and is now definitely set up for voice.#BDR=16 The DTE knows that compression requires a 38,400 bps speed, so it forces this as thenew speed. (For this example, lets say that the DTE was sending all commands,including this one, at 9600 bps.)OK This OK message is sent at 9600 bps, but the modem then switches to 38,400 bps. Allsubsequent commands are assumed to be sent at 38,400 bps until either another#BDR command is received or until the S30 timer expires. The S30 timer is nowactivated, and the default is 60 seconds.A The DTE tells the modem to answer.VCON The modem is now in Online Voice Command Mode. DTMF and calling tone detectionis enabled.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 7-37 Table 7-9. Answer Call/Play Greeting/Record Message [Cont’d]DTE to Modem Modem to DTE Description and Interpretation#VTX The DTE does not wait for any tones, and tells the modem that it is ready to send avoice greeting at the current compression and sampling settings (4-bit/7200).CONNECT The modem tells the DTE that it can now send data. The modem enters VoiceTransmit Mode and DTMF monitoring is still enabled as well as the ADPCM data flow.<Data> The DTE sends greeting message data. The modem waits up to 1 second or untilXOFF threshold is reached before starting to transmit to ensure uninterrupted dataflow. If the voice transmit buffer runs empty, the transmission is disabled.<DLE><ETX> The DTE has finished with its transmission, and now instructs the modem to enterOnline Voice Command Mode since this is the telephone line.VCON The modem tells the DTE it is done. If the DTE sends the <DLE><ETX> before themodem has finished transmitting all the data in its voice transmit buffer, the DTE mustwait for this response.#VBT=12 The DTE requests that DTMF digits be sent as “beeps” with the #VTS command whilein Online Voice Command Mode, with each “beep” having a duration of 1.2 seconds.OK The modem confirms command reception#VTS=# The DTE sends a “BEEP” to annotate its greeting message. This beep is a 1.2 secondlong DTMF #. During this period, the no abort is possible from the DTE, and should notbe necessary.OK After the modem sends the “BEEP”, it sends OK to inform the DTE that it is ready tomove on. DTMF pass through is re-enabled.#VBS=4 The DTE asks for 4-bit compression to recorded message. The DTE needs to work at38,400 bps since after start and stop bits are added the speed increases to 36,000bps.OK The modem is configured for 4-bit compression.#VRX The DTE instructs the modem to turn the line around and begin recording a messagefrom the remote.CONNECT The modem sets things up and enables ADPCM data transfer to the DTE with thecurrent silence detection sensitivity setting.<Data> ADPCM data is shipped to the DTE with shielded DTMF tones folded in. The modem islooking for silence, busy, dial tone, and loop break. The DTE records everything in itsstorage media.<DLE>b The caller has finished, hung up, and in this case, a busy cadence was detected beforeanything else such as expiration of the #VSP silence detection period.X The DTE uses a key abort to respond to a busy detection.<DLE><ETX>VCONThe modem is now in Online Voice Command Mode.H DTE sends modem to #CLS=0 with #BDR=0.
AT Command Reference Manual7-38 1048 Table 7-10. Call/Record Message/Receive FaxDTE to Modem Modem to DTE Description and Interpretation#CLS=8 Configure the modem for Voice Mode.OK The modem agrees, and is now set up for voice.#VBS=4 The DTE asks for 4-bit compression (ADPCM). The DTE needs to work at 38,400 bpssince after start and stop bits are added the speed increases to 36,000 bps.OK The modem is configured for 4-bit compression.#VSS=2 Sets silence detection sensitivity to midrange.OK The modem confirms command reception.#VLS=0 This selects the telephone line, and ensures that it is on-hook.OK The modem confirms command reception, and switches in the telephone line.#CLS=8 This ensure things are set up for voice.OK The modem confirms command reception, and is now set up for voice.RING Sometime later, the next call is received. The modem answers.#BDR=16 The DTE knows that compression requires a 38,400 bps speed, so it forces this as thenew speed. (For this example, lets say that the DTE was sending all commands,including this one, at 9600 bps.)OK This OK message is sent at 9600 bps, but the modem then switches to 38,400 bps. Allsubsequent commands are assumed to be sent at 38,400 bps. The S30 timer is nowactive.A The DTE answers.VCON The modem is now in Online Voice Command Mode. DTMF and calling tone detectionis enabled.#VTX The DTE does not wait for any tones, and tells the modem that it is ready to send avoice greeting at the current compression and sampling settings.CONNECT The modem tells the DTE that it can now send data. The modem enters VoiceTransmit Mode and DTMF monitoring is still enabled as well as ADPCM data flow.<Data> The DTE sends greeting message data. The modem waits 1 second before starting totransmit to ensure uninterrupted data flow. If the voice transmit buffer runs empty, thetransmission is disabled.<DLE><ETX> The DTE has finished its transmission and now instructs the modem to enter OnlineVoice Command Mode.VCON The modem tells the DTE it is done. If the DTE sends the <DLE><ETX> before themodem has finished transmitting all the data in its voice transmit buffer, this responseis delayed until the buffer is empty.#VBT=13 The DTE requests that DTMF digits be dialed as “beeps” while in Online VoiceCommand Mode, with each “beep” having a duration of 1.3 seconds.OK The modem agrees.#VTS=[1000,0,20],9,The DTE sends a “BEEP” to annotate its greeting message. This beep is a 2 secondlong 1000 Hz tone, followed by a 1.3 second long DTMF 9. During this period, the DTEis locked out.OK After the modem sends the “BEEP”, it sends OK to inform the DTE that it is ready tomove on. DTMF pass through is re-enabled.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 7-39 Table 7-10. Answer Call/Record Message/Receive Fax (Cont’d)DTE to Modem Modem to DTE Description and Interpretation#VRX The DTE instructs the modem to turn the line around and begin recording a messagefrom the remote.CONNECT The modem sets things up and enables ADPCM data transfer to the DTE with thecurrent silence sensitivity setting.<Data> ADPCM data is shipped to the DTE with shielded DTMF tones folded in. The modem islooking for silence, busy, dial tone, and loop break. The DTE records everything in itsstorage media.<DLE>5 The caller has finished his voice message, but is now insisting that he be able to sendus a facsimile.X DTE sends `X' as key abort. If the user tried to keep talking after he hit the DTMF 5,anything said was lost. Whatever he said before the 5 is on disk.<DLE><ETX>VCONThe modem obeys key abort. Receive Mode is canceled, and the modem is now inOnline Voice Command Mode. DTMF is still passed through.#CLS=1 The DTE instructs the modem to pretend no voice activity has taken place, althoughthe modem does not hang up if the fax fails.OK The modem now thinks its a Class 1 Fax modem. The DTE can now tailor the +Fsettings which were not accessible until +FCLASS became 1.A Answer tone is generated and prompts the user on the telephone to press the buttonon his fax machine to send his fax. After the successful fax is received, the modemhangs up.
AT Command Reference Manual7-40 1048 Table 7-11. Answer Call, Determine It's a FaxDTE to Modem Modem to DTE Description and InterpretationRING Sometime later, the next beta-site calls.#CLS=8 Configure the modem for Voice Mode.OK The modem agrees, and is now set up for voice.#VBS=4 The DTE asks for 4-bit compression (ADPCM). The DTE needs to work at 38,400 bpssince after start and stop bits are added the speed increases to 36,000 bps.OK The modem is configured for 4-bit compression.#BDR=16 The DTE knows that compression requires a 38,400 bps speed, so it forces this as thenew speed.OK This OK message is sent at 9600 bps, but the modem then switches to 38,400 bps. Allsubsequent commands are assumed to be sent at 38,400 bps. The S30 timer is nowactive.#VSS =2 Sets silence detection sensitivity to midrange.OK The modem confirms command reception.A Finally, the modem answers.VCON The modem is now in Online Voice Command Mode. DTMF and calling tone detectionis enabled. (Note that alternatively, the DTE can go into the Transmit or Receive modeand look for either calling tone or silence as a means of discrimination.) The DTE waitsa few seconds to give a possible fax machine or remote data/fax modem a chance tosend calling tone without being disturbed by a voice greeting. (In this example onlycalling tone is considered, which excludes a person sending a fax when he hearsanswer tone.)<DLE>c The modem has detected T.30 Calling tone and presents this information to the DTE.#CLS=1 The DTE decides to receive the fax, and tells the modem to pretend that it just wentoff-hook as a Class 1 Facsimile modem. The DTE must be able to handle Class 1commands from here on. NoteOK The modem is now a Class 1 fax modem.A The modem pretends that it just got the incoming RING, and modem handles the factthat it is already off-hook.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 7-41 Table 7-12. Adaptive Fax/Data/Voice; Determine DataDTE to Modem Modem to DTE Description and InterpretationRING Sometime later, we receive a call.#CLS=8 Configure the modem for Voice Mode (still ADPCM).OK The modem agrees, and is now set up for voice, but the DTE can change things duringthe discrimination phase.#BDR=16 The DTE knows that the compression requires a 38,400 bps speed, so it forces this asthe new speed.OK This OK message is sent at 9600 bps, but the modem then switches to 38,400 bps.The S30 timer is now active.#VSS=2 Sets silence detection sensitivity to midrange.OK The modem confirms command reception.A The DTE answers. (Note that this is where the DTE can let another RING go by toprocess Caller ID.)VCON The modem is now in Online Voice Command Mode. DTMF and calling tone detectionis enabled. If fax or data calling tones are detected, the DTE can change to Fax orData Mode.#VTX The DTE immediately switches to Voice Transmit Mode to send out a short greeting.CONNECT The modem says, “Send me the ADPCM data.”<Data> The DTE sends a previously recorded message from a very fast talking person: “Hello,this is Dave. Press * to send a fax, # for help, or leave your message at the beep.”Note that the caller can enter DTMF tones at any time, which the DTE can take intoaccount, or calling tone can still be detected.<DLE><ETX> This ends the greeting message.VCON The modem switches back to Online Voice Command Mode.#VTS=# The DTE sends # as the beep.VCON The modem is still able to receive DTMF or Calling tone here.#VRX Enter Receive Mode. Now the modem is clocking silence, as well as DTMF, andrecording whatever the caller says.<DLE>s #VSP must have been set to 35, since 3.5 seconds later the modem sends thisindication of silence period expiration. No ADPCM data was sent to the DTE, becausethe data pump deleted all 3.5 seconds of silence. This tells the DTE that nobody istalking.! The DTE issues a key abort to switch to Online Voice Command Mode.<DLE><ETX>VCONThe modem exits Voice Receive Mode and switches to Online Voice Command Mode.#CLS=0 The DTE received no voice data, just the silence indicator after a 3.5 second wait.Since there was no calling tone and the user never entered any DTMF tones, the DTEassumes it must be a calling data modem. If the data handshake fails, the modemdoes not hang up the line thus giving the DTE another chance to try the fax again (inthis case).OK The modem is now a data modem.A The modem pretends that it just got RING, try V.22 bis/V.42 bis, etc.
AT Command Reference Manual7-42 1048 Table 7-13. Originate a Call, Send Answerer a MessageDTE to Modem Modem to DTE Description and Interpretation#CLS=8 Configure the modem for Voice Mode (still ADPCM).OK The modem agrees, and is now set up for voice.#BDR=16 The DTE knows that compression requires a 38,400 bps speed, so it forces this as thenew speed.OK This OK message is sent at 2400 bps, but the modem then switches to 38,400 bps.#VLS=0 This ensures that the telephone line is selected.OK The modem agrees.#VRA=45 The DTE allows 4.5 seconds for ringback to stop before assuming that the modemthinks that the remote has answered.OK The modem agrees with the DTE's assumption.DT6807 The DTE makes a telephone call, and the modem dials and goes through callprogress. BUSY or NO DIALTONE can be detected, but in this example, the modemgets ringback.VCON This message is sent 4.5 seconds after the third ringback cadence is detected by themodem. The modem is in effect assuming that the remote telephone was answered onthe third ring because no fourth ringback was detected before the #VRA time-out. Themodem enters Online Voice Command Mode, and DTMF and answer tone detection isenabled. (Note that during this period, the modem might have detected answer tonefrom a data modem. In this case, the appropriate <DLE> shielded code has to be sentprompting the DTE to pursue a data handshake.)#VTX The DTE has a message to send.CONNECT The modem says: “send it.”<Data> The DTE sends the message: “Hi Dave. Your mother called.”<DLE><ETX> Procedure complete.VCON DTMF still active.H The DTE has completed its forwarding task.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 8-18. AT COMMAND SET SUMMARY8.1  BASIC AT COMMANDSCommand FunctionA/ Re-execute command.A Go off-hook and attempt to answer a call.B0 Select V.22 connection at 1200 bps.B1 Select Bell 212A connection at 1200 bps.C1 Return OK message.Dn Dial modifier.E0 Turn off command echo.E1 Turn on command echo.F0 Select auto-detect mode (equivalent to N1). (RC144)F1 Select V.21 or Bell 103. (RC144)F2 Reserved. (RC144)F3 Select V.23 line modulation. (RC144)F4 Select V.22 or Bell 212A 1200 bps line speed. (RC144)F5 Select V.22 bis line modulation. (RC144)F6 Select V.32 bis or V.32 4800 line modulation. (RC144)F7 Select V.32 bis 7200 line modulation. (RC144)F8 Select V.32 bis or V.32 9600 line modulation. (RC144)F9 Select V.32 bis 12000 line modulation. (RC144)F10 Select V.32 bis 14400 line modulation. (RC144)H0 Initiate a hang-up sequence.H1 If on-hook, go off-hook and enter command mode.I0 Report product code.I1 Report pre-computed checksum.I2 Report OK.I3 Report firmware revision, model, and interface type.I4 Report response programmed by an OEM.I5 Report the country code parameter.I6 Report modem data pump model and code revision.I7 Reports the DAA code (W-class models only).L0 Set low speaker volume.L1 Set low speaker volume.L2 Set medium speaker volume.L3 Set high speaker volume.M0 Turn speaker off.M1 Turn speaker on during handshaking and turn speaker off while receiving carrier.M2 Turn speaker on during handshaking and while receiving carrier.M3 Turn speaker off during dialing and receiving carrier and turn speaker on duringanswering.N0 Turn off automode detection.N1 Turn on automode detection.O0 Go on-line.O1 Go on-line and initiate a retrain sequence.P Force pulse dialing.Q0 Allow result codes to DTE.Q1 Inhibit result codes to DTE.Sn Select S-Register as default.Sn? Return the value of S-Register n.=v Set default S-Register to value v.? Return the value of default S-Register.
AT Command Reference Manual8-2 1048T Force DTMF dialing.V0 Report short form (terse) result codes.V1 Report long form (verbose) result codes.W0 Report DTE speed in EC mode.W1 Report line speed, EC protocol and DTE speed.W2 Report DCE speed in EC mode.X0 Report basic call progress result codes, i.e., OK, CONNECT, RING, NO CARRIER (also,for busy, if enabled, and dial tone not detected), NO ANSWER and ERROR.X1 Report basic call progress result codes and connections speeds (OK, CONNECT, RING,NO CARRIER (also, for busy, if enabled, and dial tone not detected), NO ANSWER,CONNECT XXXX, and ERROR.X2 Report basic call progress result codes and connections speeds, i.e., OK, CONNECT,RING, NO CARRIER (also, for busy, if enabled, and dial tone not detected), NOANSWER, CONNECT XXXX, and ERROR.X3 Report basic call progress result codes and connection rate, i.e., OK, CONNECT, RING,NO CARRIER, NO ANSWER, CONNECT XXXX, BUSY, and ERROR.X4 Report all call progress result codes and connection rate, i.e., OK, CONNECT, RING, NOCARRIER, NO ANSWER, CONNECT XXXX, BUSY, NO DIAL TONE and ERROR.Y0 Disable long space disconnect before on-hook.Y1 Enable long space disconnect before on-hook.Z0 Restore stored profile 0 after warm reset.Z1 Restore stored profile 1 after warm reset.&C0 Force RLSD active regardless of the carrier state.&C1 Allow RLSD to follow the carrier state.&D0 Interpret DTR ON-to-OFF transition per &Qn:&Q0, &Q5, &Q6 The modem ignores DTR.&Q1, &Q4 The modem hangs up.&Q2, &Q3 The modem hangs up.&D1 Interpret DTR ON-to-OFF transition per &Qn:&Q0, &Q1, &Q4, &Q5, &Q6 Asynchronous escape.&Q2, &Q3 The modem hangs up.&D2 Interpret DTR ON-to-OFF transition per &Qn:&Q0 through &Q6 The modem hangs up.&D3 Interpret DTR ON-to-OFF transition per &Qn:.&Q0, &Q1, &Q4, &Q5, &Q6 The modem performs soft reset.&Q2, &Q3 The modem hangs up.&F0 Restore factory configuration 0.&F1 Restore factory configuration 1.&G0 Disable guard tone.&G1 Disable guard tone.&G2 Enable 1800 Hz guard tone.&J0 Set S-Register response only for compatibility.&J1 Set S-Register response only for compatibility.&K0 Disable DTE/DCE flow control.&K3 Enable RTS/CTS DTE/DCE flow control.&K4 Enable XON/XOFF DTE/DCE flow control.&K5 Enable transparent XON/XOFF flow control.&K6 Enable both RTS/CTS and XON/XOFF flow control.&L0 Select dial up line operation.*  Serial interface operation only.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 8-3&M0 Select direct asynchronous mode.&M1 Select sync connect with async off-line command mode. *&M2 Select sync connect with async off-line command mode and enable DTR dialing ofdirectory zero. *&M3 Select sync connect with async off-line command mode and enable DTR to act asTalk/Data switch. *&P0 Set 10 pps pulse dial with 39%/61% make/break.&P1 Set 10 pps pulse dial with 33%/67% make/break.&P2 Set 20 pps pulse dial with 39%/61% make/break.&P3 Set 20 pps pulse dial with 33%/67% make/break.&Q0 Select direct asynchronous mode.&Q1 Select sync connect with async off-line command mode. *&Q2 Select sync connect with async off-line command mode and enable DTR dialing ofdirectory zero. *&Q3 Select sync connect with async off-line command mode and enable DTR to act asTalk/Data switch. *&Q4 Select Hayes AutoSync mode.&Q5 Modem negotiates an error corrected link.&Q6 Select asynchronous operation in normal mode.&R0 CTS tracks RTS (async) or acts per V.25 (sync).&R1 CTS is always active.&S0 DSR is always active.&S1 DSR acts per V.25.&T0 Terminate any test in progress.&T1 Initiate local analog loopback.&T2 Returns ERROR result code.&T3 Initiate local digital loopback.&T4 Allow remote digital loopback.&T5 Disallow remote digital loopback request.&T6 Request an RDL without self-test.&T7 Request an RDL with self-test.&T8 Initiate local analog loop with self-test.&V Display current configurations.&V1 Display connection statistics&W0 Store the active profile in NVRAM profile 0.&W1 Store the active profile in NVRAM profile 1.&X0 Select internal timing for the transmit clock.&X1 Select external timing for the transmit clock.&X2 Select slave receive timing for the transmit clock.&Y0 Recall stored profile 0 upon power up.&Y1 Recall stored profile 1 upon power up.&Zn=x Store dial string x (to 34) to location n (0 to 3).%E0 Disable line quality monitor and auto retrain.%E1 Enable line quality monitor and auto retrain.%E2 Enable line quality monitor and fallback/fall forward.%L Return received line signal level.%Q Report the line signal quality.%7 Plug and Play serial number%8  Plug and Play vendor ID and product number*  Serial interface operation only.
AT Command Reference Manual8-4 1048\Kn Controls break handling during three states:When modem receives a break from the DTE:\K0,2,4 Enter on-line command mode, no break sent to the remote modem.\K1 Clear buffers and send break to remote modem.\K3 Send break to remote modem immediately.\K5 Send break to remote modem in sequence with transmitted data.When modem receives \B in on-line command state:\K0,1 Clear buffers and send break to remote modem.\K2,3 Send break to remote modem immediately.\K4,5 Send break to remote modem in sequence with transmitted data.When modem receives break from the remote modem:\K0,1 Clear data buffers and send break to DTE.\K2,3 Send a break immediately to DTE.\K4,5 Send a break with received data to the DTE.\N0 Select normal speed buffered mode.\N1 Select direct mode.\N2 Select reliable link mode.\N3 Select auto reliable mode.\N4 Force LAPM mode.\N5 Force MNP mode.\V0 Connect messages are controlled by the command settings X, W, and S95.\V1 Connect messages are displayed in the single line format.+MS Select modulation.+H0 Disable RPI/Video Ready Mode.+H1 Enable RPI and set DTE speed to 19200 bps.+H2 Enable RPI and set DTE speed to 38400 bps.+H3 Enable RPI and set DTE speed to 57600 bps.+H11 Enable RPI+ mode.+H16 Enable Video Ready Mode**0 Download to flash memory at last sensed speed.**1 Download to flash memory at 38.4 kbps.**2 Download to flash memory at 57.6 kbps.-SDR=0 Disable Distinctive Ring.-SDR=1 Enable Distinctive Ring Type 1.-SDR=2 Enable Distinctive Ring Type 2.-SDR=3 Enable Distinctive Ring Type 1 and 2.-SDR=4 Enable Distinctive Ring Type 3.-SDR=5 Enable Distinctive Ring Type 1 and 3.-SDR=6 Enable Distinctive Ring Type 2 and 3.-SDR=7 Enable Distinctive Ring Type 1, 2, and 3.8.2 ECC COMMANDS%C0 Disable data compression.%C1 Enable MNP 5 data compression.%C2 Enable V.42 bis data compression.%C3 Enable both V.42 bis and MNP 5 compression.\A0 Set maximum block size in MNP to 64.\A1 Set maximum block size in MNP to 128.\A2 Set maximum block size in MNP to 192.\A3 Set maximum block size in MNP to 256.\Bn Send break of n x 100 ms.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 8-58.3  MNP 10 COMMANDS-K0 Disable MNP 10 extended services.-K1 Enable MNP 10 extended services.-K2 Enable MNP 10 extended services detection only.-SEC=0 Disable MNP10-EC.-SEC=1,[<tx level>] Enable MNP10-EC and set transmit level <tx level> 0 to 30 (0 dBm to -30 dBm).8.4 W-CLASS COMMANDS*B Display list of permanently blacklisted numbers.*D Display list of delayed numbers.*NCn Change country to one of eight in NVRAM.8.5  CALLER ID COMMANDS#CID=0 Disable Caller ID.#CID=1 Enable Caller ID with formatted presentation.#CID=2 Enable Caller ID with unformatted presentation.8.6  FAX CLASS 1+FCLASS=n Service class.+FAE=n Data/fax auto answer+FRH=n Receive data with HDLC framing.+FRM=n Receive data.+FRS=n Receive silence.+FTH=n Transmit data with HDLC framing.+FTM=n Transmit data.+FTS=n Stop transmission and wait.
AT Command Reference Manual8-6 10488.7  FAX CLASS 2+FCLASS=n Service class.+FAA=n Adaptive answer.+FAXERR Fax error value.+FBOR Phase C data bit order.+FBUF? Buffer size (read only).+FCFR Indicate confirmation to receive.+FCLASS= Service class.+FCON Facsimile connection response.+FCIG Set the polled station identification.+FCIG: Report the polled station identification.+FCR Capability to receive.+FCR= Capability to receive.+FCSI: Report the called station ID.+FDCC= DCE capabilities parameters.+FDCS: Report current session.+FDCS= Current session results.+FDIS: Report remote capabilities.+FDIS= Current sessions parameters.+FDR Begin or continue phase C receive data.+FDT= Data transmission.+FDTC: Report the polled station capabilities.+FET: Post page message response.+FET=N Transmit page punctuation.+FHNG Call termination with status.+FK Session termination.+FLID= Local ID string.+FLPL Document for polling.+FMDL? Identify model.+FMFR? Identify manufacturer.+FPHCTO Phase C time out.+FPOLL Indicates polling request.+FPTS: Page transfer status.+FPTS= Page transfer status.+FREV? Identify revision.+FSPL Enable polling+FTSI: Report the transmit station ID.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 8-78.8 VOICE/AUDIO COMMANDS#BDR Select baud rate (turn off autobaud).#CLS Select data, fax, or voice.#MDL? Identify model.#MFR? Identify manufacturer.#REV? Identify revision level.#SPK= Speakerphone setting.#TL Audio output transmit level.#VBQ? Query buffer size.#VBS Bits per sample.#VBT Beep tone timer.#VCI? Identify compression method.#VGT Set playback volume in the command state.#VLS Voice line select.#VRA Ringback goes away timer (originate).#VRN Ringback never came timer (originate).#VRX Voice receive mode.#VSD Enable silence deletion (no function, command response only).#VSK Buffer skid setting.#VSP Silence detection period (voice receive).#VSR Sampling rate selection.#VSS Silence detection tuner (voice receive).#VTD DTMF/tone reporting.#VTM Enable timing mark placement.#VTS Generate tone signals.#VTX Voice transmit mode.8.9 CELLULAR COMMANDS^C2 Download cellular phone driver.^I Identify cellular phone driver.^T6 Indicate status of cellular phone.8.10  AUDIOSPAN AND DSVD COMMANDS-SMS= Select AudioSpan/DSVD Mode-SSE= Enable/Disable DSVD-SQS= Select AudioSpan Modulation8.11  SYNCHRONOUS ACCESS MODE COMMANDS+ES Enables and disables Synchronous Access Mode in the client or central site modem+ESA Configures the operation of the Synchronous Access Submode+ITF Selects Transmit Flow Control Thresholds
AT Command Reference Manual8-8 1048This page is intentionally blank.
AT Command Reference Manual1048 9-19. COMMON CONFIGURATION SETUP STRINGSThis appendix describes setup strings to establish commonly used configurations.1. Force V.42 bis data compression with LAP-M error correction.AT\N4%C2-K02. Force V.42 bis data compression with MNP error correction.AT\N5%C23. Force MNP 5 data compression with MNP error correction.AT\N5%C1Note: With the setup strings in examples 1-3, if the remote is unable to negotiate the desire rate mode, the modemwill disconnect and respond with NO CARRIER.4. Auto negotiate data compression and error correction.AT&F (factory defaults) orAT\N3%C3In this mode, the modem prefers LAP-M over MNP 10, MNP 10 over MNP 4, and V.42 bis over MNP 5. If errorcorrection is not negotiated, the modem will connect in normal mode.
AT Command Reference Manual9-2 1048This page is intentionally blank.
INSIDE BACK COVER NOTES
HeadquartersRockwell Semiconductor Systems4311 Jamboree Road,P.O. Box CNewport Beach, CA 92658-8902Phone: (714) 221-4600Fax: (714) 221-6375European HeadquartersRockwell Semiconductor SystemsS.A.R.L.Les Taissounieres B1Route des DolinesSophia Antipolis Cedex06905 ValbonneFrancePhone: (33) 93 00 33 35Fax: (33) 93 00 33 03For more information:Call  1-800-854-8099International information:Call  1-714-833-6996URL Address:http://www.nb.rockwell.comE-Mail Address:literature@nb.rockwell.comREGIONAL SALES OFFICESUS Southwest OfficeRockwell Semiconductor Systems5000 Birch StreetSuite 400Newport Beach, CA  92660Phone: (714) 222-9119Fax: (714) 222-0620US Southwest Satellite OfficeRockwell Semiconductor Systems1000 Business Center CircleSuite 215Thousand Oaks, CA  91320Phone: (805) 376-0559Fax: (805) 376-8180US South Central OfficeRockwell Semiconductor Systems2001 North Collins BlvdSuite 103Richardson, TX  75080Phone: (214) 379-9310Fax: (214) 479-9317US Southeast OfficeRockwell Semiconductor Systems900 Ashwood ParkwaySuite 400Atlanta, GA  30338Phone: (770) 393-1830Fax: (770) 395-1419US Southeast Satellite OfficeRockwell Semiconductor SystemsArbor Shoreline Office Park19345 US 19 N.Suite 108Clearwater, FL  34624-3156Phone: (813) 538-8837Fax: (813) 531-3031US Northwest OfficeRockwell Semiconductor SystemsUS Northwest Office3600 Pruneridge AvenueSuite 100Santa Clara, CA  95051Phone: (408) 249-9696Fax: (408) 249-7113US North Central OfficeRockwell Semiconductor SystemsTwo Pierce PlaceChancellory ParkSuite 810Itasca, IL  60143Phone: (708) 773-3454Fax: (708) 773-3907US Northeast OfficeRockwell Semiconductor Systems239 Littleton RoadSuite 4AWestford, MA  01886Phone: (508) 692-7660Fax: (508) 692-8185AustraliaRockwell Semiconductor SystemsRockwell Australia Limited3 Thomas Holt DriveP.O. Box 165North Ryde, NSW 2113AustraliaPhone: (61-2) 805 5555Fax: (61-2) 805 5599Europe MediterraneanRockwell Semiconductor Systemsc/o Rockwell Automation S.r.l.Via Di Vittorio, 120017 Mazzo Di Rho (MI)ItalyPhone: (39 2) 93179911Fax (39 2) 93179913Europe NorthRockwell Semiconductor Systems, Ltd.Berkshire CourtWestern RoadBracknellBerkshire RG12 1REEnglandPhone: +44 1344 486 444Fax: +44 1344 486 555Europe SouthRockwell Semiconductor SystemsS.A.R.L.Tour GANCedex 1392082 Paris La Defense 2FrancePhone: (33-1) 49-06-3980Fax: (33-1) 49-06-3990GermanyRockwell Semiconductor SystemsRockwell Int'l GmbH GermanyPaul-Gerhardt-Allee 50 a81245 MunchenGermanyPhone: (49-89) 829-1320Fax: (49-89) 834-2734Hong KongRockwell Int'l (Asia Pacific) Ltd.13th Floor, Suites 8-10,Harbour Centre25 Harbour RoadWanchai,Hong KongPhone: (852) 2 827-0181Fax: (852) 2 827-6488JapanRockwell Int'l Japan Co., Ltd.Shimomoto Bldg1-46-3 Hatsudai, Shibuya-kuTokyo, 151JapanPhone: (81-3) 5371 1520Fax: (81-3) 5371 1501KoreaRockwell-Collins Int'l, Inc.Room No. 1508Korea Textile Centre Building944-31, Daechi-3dongKangnam P.O. Box 2037Kangnam-kuSeoulKoreaPhone: (82-2) 565-2880Fax: (82-2) 565-1440SingaporeRockwell-Collins Int'l, Inc.230 Orchard Road #10-230/232Faber HouseSingapore 0923Phone: (65) 732-2292Fax: (65) 733-0835TaiwanRockwell Int'l Taiwan Company, Ltd.Room 2808 International Trade Bldg.333, Keelung Road, Section ITaipei,Taiwan10548 ROCPhone: (886-2) 720-0282Fax: (886-2) 757-6760©1997, Rockwell International CorporationPrinted in U.S.A.All Rights Reserved

Navigation menu